Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen‐ sive information about operating your vehicle ... P238 0728 13 Part no. 238 584 01 09 Edition B-2021. Apple iOS. AndroidTM.
tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi‐ media system ( menu item "Vehi‐ cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your.
Ownerâs Manuals | Mercedes-Benz Canada
Digital in the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the con- tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi- media system (menu item "Vehi- cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.
Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen- sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.
Digital on the Internet You can find the Operator's Man- ual on the Mercedes-Benz home- page.
Digital as an app The Mercedes-Benz Guides app is available free-of-charge in familiar app stores.
É2385840109aËÍ
2385840109 Order no. P238 0728 13 Part no. 238 584 01 09 Edition B-2021
Apple® iOS
AndroidTM
Mercedes-Benz
E-Class Coupe
E-Class Coupe
Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz
Front passenger airbag warning
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada
Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team ©MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans- lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.
Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany
As at 05.06.20
Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera- tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre- gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol- lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment
R Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif- fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus- trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company
23858420385184001909
2 Contents
Symbols ........................................................ 5 At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps ......................... 10 Overhead control panel ................................ 12 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 14 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 16 Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 18 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 18 General notes ............................................. 20 Protection of the environment ...................... 20 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... 20 Operator's Manual ........................................ 21 Service and vehicle operation ...................... 22 Operating safety ........................................... 23 Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ..................................... 25 Diagnostics connection ................................ 25 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 27 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 27
Notes for persons with electronic medi- cal aids ......................................................... 27 Problems with your vehicle ........................... 28 Reporting safety defects ............................... 28 Limited Warranty .......................................... 29 QR code for rescue card ............................... 29 Data storage ................................................. 29 Copyright ...................................................... 34 Occupant safety ......................................... 35 Restraint system ........................................... 35 Seat belts ..................................................... 37 Airbags ......................................................... 42 PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... 50 Safely transporting children in the vehi- cle ................................................................. 51 Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 63 Opening and closing .................................. 64 SmartKey ...................................................... 64 Doors ............................................................ 69 Trunk ............................................................ 72 Side windows ................................................ 78 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 81
Roller sun blinds ........................................... 85 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 85 Seats and stowing ..................................... 89 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi- tion ............................................................... 89 Seats ............................................................ 90 Steering wheel ............................................ 100 Easy entry and exit feature ......................... 102 Memory function ........................................ 103 Stowage areas ............................................ 105 Sockets ....................................................... 112 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna ... 113 Installing and removing the floor mats ........ 115 Light and visibility .................................... 116 Exterior lighting ........................................... 116 Interior lighting ........................................... 124 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 126 Mirrors ........................................................ 129
Contents 3
Climate control ........................................ 133 Overview of climate control systems .......... 133 Operating the climate control system ......... 134 Driving and parking ................................. 140 Driving ........................................................ 140 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ........................... 152 Automatic transmission .............................. 154 Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 158 Refueling .................................................... 158 Parking ....................................................... 160 Driving and driving safety systems .............. 167 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 221 Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 222 Notes on the Instrument Display and onboard computer .......................................... 222 Instrument Display overview ...................... 223 Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 224 Operating the on-board computer .............. 224 Overview of displays on the multifunc- tion display ................................................. 226
Head-up Display ......................................... 226 MBUX multimedia system ...................... 229 Overview and operation .............................. 229 System settings .......................................... 237 Navigation ................................................... 241 Telephone ................................................... 247 Mercedes me and apps .............................. 250 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... 258 Radio & media ............................................ 262 Sound settings ........................................... 269 Maintenance and care ............................. 270 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 270 Engine compartment .................................. 271 Cleaning and care ....................................... 276 Breakdown assistance ............................ 283 Emergency .................................................. 283 Flat tire ....................................................... 284 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 290 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 295 Electrical fuses ........................................... 300
Wheels and tires ...................................... 304 Notes on noise or unusual handling char- acteristics ................................................... 304 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ 304 Notes on snow chains ................................ 305 Tire pressure .............................................. 305 Loading the vehicle ..................................... 312 Tire labeling ................................................ 316 Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 321 Changing a wheel ....................................... 324 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 333 Technical data .......................................... 335 Notes on technical data .............................. 335 Vehicle electronics ..................................... 335 Radio operating permits for vehicle com- ponents ...................................................... 337 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................. 337 Operating fluids .......................................... 339 Vehicle data ................................................ 345
4 Contents Display messages and warning/indi- cator lamps .............................................. 348 Display messages ....................................... 348 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 395 Index .......................................................... 410
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol- lowing symbols:
& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi- ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi- ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
#
Instruction
(/ page) Further information on a topic
Display Information on the multifunction dis- play/media display
4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system
5
Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system
*
Indicates a cause
Symbols 5
6 At a glance Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles
At a glance Cockpit 7
1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles
156 G õ Extends/retracts the seat belt extender
40
2 Combination switch
117 H è ECO start/stop function
149
3 Instrument Display
223 I c Active Parking Assist
217
4 DIRECT SELECT lever
154 J É Sets the vehicle level
204
5 Media display
229 K DYNAMIC SELECT switch
153
6 Start/stop button
141 L PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
47
7 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applica- tions
231 M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem
224
8 Climate control systems
134 N Adjusts the steering wheel mechanically
100
9 Glove box
107 O Adjusts the steering wheel electrically
101
A £ Hazard warning light system B Storage compartment C Touchpad D 8 Controller for volume and switching
sound on/off
118
ý Switches the steering wheel heater
107
on/off
231 P Control panel:
229
On-board computer
Cruise control
102
224
176
E Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
229
I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
on/off F D Rear-window roller sunblind
Q Diagnostics connection 85
180
25
8 At a glance Cockpit
R Opens the hood S ! Electric parking brake T Light switch
271
164
116
10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps Instrument Display
1 #! Turn signal lights 2 6 Restraint system 3 å ESP® OFF
÷ ESP® 4 R Rear fog lamp 5 K High beam
L Low beam T Parking lamps 6 ÿ Coolant temperature 7 Coolant temperature display 8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 9 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only J Brakes (yellow), Canada only A # Electrical malfunction B L Distance warning
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps 11
117 C ! ABS
406
397 D Ù Electric power steering
398
406 E h Tire pressure monitoring system
408
406 F 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location
399
117 117 116 116 399 223 402 402 402 399 405
indicator G Fuel level H Electric parking brake (red)
F USA only ! Canada only I Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only J ü Seat belt K ; Check Engine L ä Suspension
223
402
402
397
399
405
12 At a glance Overhead control panel
1 Sun visors
2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
3 S Switches the automatic interior lighting
control on/off
4 G SOS button
5 c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off
6 ; me button
At a glance Overhead control panel 13
7 u Switches the rear interior lighting
124
on/off
8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
124
on/off
9 Eyeglasses compartment
252 A 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with
124
power tilt/sliding panel
3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind
252 B Inside rearview mirror
124
124
81
81
130
14 At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment
1 Adjusts the seats electrically
2 w Switches the seat heating on/off
3 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off
4 Switches AIRSCARF on/off
5 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle
6 p Opens/closes the trunk lid
7 Í Operates the outside mirrors
8 W Opens/closes the right side window
9 W Opens/closes the rear right side win-
dow
A Child safety lock for the rear side windows
B W Opens/closes the rear left side window
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 15
93 C W Opens/closes the left side window 97 D Opens the door 99 E Operates the memory function 99 F Sets the seat fore-and-aft position 69 G Adjusts the seat cushion length 72 H Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support 129 I Configures the seat settings 78 J Adjusts the head restraints 78 K Adjusts the seat cushion inclination
L Adjusts the seat height 62 M Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 78
78
69
104
92
92
93
95
93
92
92
92
16 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
1 B-pillar with: QR code for accessing the rescue card
2 Safety vests 3 ; me button
G SOS button 4 Checking and refilling operating fluids 5 Tow-starting or towing away 6 Flat tire 7 Starting assistance
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 17
8 £ Hazard warning light system
29 9 Fuel filler flap with:
283
information label on fuel type
252
Information label on tire pressure
252
QR code for accessing the rescue card
339 A Tow-starting or towing away
296 B TIREFIT kit
284 C First-aid kit (soft sided)
294 D Warning triangle
118
158
307
29
296
286
284
283
18 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5Õ
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Operator's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to find
quick answers to questions about the opera- tion of the vehicle.
R Quick start: here is where you find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle.
R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Dis- play.
R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks.
R Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual.
1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu
Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and col- lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and hold-
ing an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:
Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man- ual is deactivated while driving.
Digital Operator's Manual 19
20 General notes
Protection of the environment
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi- ronment. Please observe the following rec- ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor-
rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ute to environmental protection.
# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf- fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu- lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon- ditioned components
MercedesBenz AG offers recycled recondi- tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo-
nents and parts from MercedesBenz AG.
* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi- ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol- lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
General notes 21
# Have aftermarket installation of acces- sories carried out at a qualified special- ist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele- vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal- function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine- Parts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro- vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 337) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts.
Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man- ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus- trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi- cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
22 General notes
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi-
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author- ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.
Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- ment wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces- sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera- ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi- cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Possible danger due to substances hazard- ous to health In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal- functions or system failures
To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and
maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts
Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com- ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec-
tronic component parts or their soft- ware.
General notes 23
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under- side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam- mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
24 General notes
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv- ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo- nents
In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot- hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo- nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon- ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam- mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while con- tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work- shop.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys- tem (EQ Boost technology)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys- tem contain individual high-voltage compo- nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.
If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged com- ponent parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modifications to compo-
nent parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts
of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of high-
voltage components after an accident.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These compo- nents are marked with a high voltage label:
General notes 25
All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi- cle components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com- ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno- vation, Science and Economic Development Can- ada's RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."
Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile phones (WMI) This equipment complies with the FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon- trolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 0 cm (in contact) between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-loca- ted or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi- ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): this device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules."
The name and address of the responsible party is: Continental Automotive Systems US Inc. 2400 Executive Hills Drive Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980 United States of America
Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter- face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work- shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con- necting devices to the diagnostics con- nection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.
26 General notes
# For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your authorized MercedesBenz Center.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.
Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and condi- tions for this matter.
Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos- tics connection can lead to emissions monitor- ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor- rectly carry out the work required on your vehi- cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and
conversions R Work on electronic components
R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ boost technology): work on high voltage components of the 48 V onboard electrical system
MercedesBenz recommends an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
General notes 27
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta- tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola- ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac- turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi- bility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-
28 General notes
Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi- ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis- faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec- essary, contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed- eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov
Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans- port Canada in addition to notifying MercedesBenz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division tollfree in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels
Limited Warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc- tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola- tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat-
ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi- cle damage.
QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con- tains the most important information about your
General notes 29
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage Data processing in the vehicle Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi- cle. Control units process data which, for exam- ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable comfort or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general informa- tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties and for what pur- pose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in ques-
30 General notes
tion in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available on line and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally. Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun- try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con- trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns. Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov- ernmental entities, upon request and to the
extent required, data stored by the manufac- turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ- ual cases and within the applicable legal frame- work, authorized to read out data from the vehi- cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi- cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,
longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera- tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas- tened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data
memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent docu- mentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components,
such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situa- tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter- vention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle damage
In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem- porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.
If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the read out is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con- nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal- functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac- turer is subject to product liability. For this rea- son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These
data can also be used to examine the custom- er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.
Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ- ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
General notes 31
R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte- grated navigation system
R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services
These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par- ticular, when you use online services in accord- ance with the settings that you have selected. Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart- phone can be output via the multimedia system.
32 General notes
Certain information is simultaneously transfer- red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, the day/night mode and other general vehicle sta- tuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par- ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter- mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec- tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire- less network connection is made possible by the
vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func- tions can be used via the wireless network con- nection. This includes online services and appli- cations/apps provided to you by the manufac- turer or by other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of serv- ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con- tractual agreement or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva- ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi- bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac- turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per- sonal data.
Data protection rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection
and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac- turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi- media system or Mercedes me connect, addi- tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca- tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con- nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit- uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under- standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were
operating R Whether or not the driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
General notes 33
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci- dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
34 General notes
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with- out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les- see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter- ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys- tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Copyright Free and open source software
Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG, Inc.
R DTSTM is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby® and MLPTM are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trade-
marks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen-
tex Corporation. R iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis- tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
R HD RadioTM is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation.
R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
R ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis- tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com- ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi- cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro- tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension- ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro- tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos-
sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Occupant safety 35
Reduced restraint system protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec- ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint
system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their software.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom- modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys-
36 Occupant safety
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys- tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci- dent
How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli- sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci- sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with- out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel- eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa- tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal
impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron-
tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,
frontal impact
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic- ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig- gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear-
ing.
R In general, the powder released is not haz- ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro- tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo- rate, for example.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
Occupant safety 37
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can- not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu-
pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor- rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 89). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro- vide the intended level of protection, each vehi- cle occupant must observe the following infor- mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body.
38 Occupant safety
R The seat belt must be routed across the cen- ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible.
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul- der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil- dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when
securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 105). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip- ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 55). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 52).
Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com-
mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an extended seat belt extender while the vehicle is in motion
If the seat belt does not sit correctly on the body, it cannot perform its intended protec- tive function.
# Always ensure that the seat belt extender is retracted while the vehicle is in motion.
If the seat belt extender does not retract auto- matically, it can be retracted manually. To do so, press the seat belt extender back as far as it will go before starting the vehicle. Pressing the seat belt extender back into place requires force.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 5 ft
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys- tem.
& WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckles
If seat belt buckles are blocked and cannot be moved downwards, the function of the Emergency Tensioning Devices is impaired. The seat belts may no longer perform their intended protective function. # Always ensure that the seat belt buck-
les are not blocked.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor
Occupant safety 39
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
40 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi- ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Extending/retracting the seat belt extender
When the door is closed, the seat belt extender extends.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
The seat belt extender button is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles. You can also extend the seat-belt extender by using the õ seat-belt extender button in the center console. # Switch on the ignition. # Press the õ seat belt extender button.
The seat belt extender extends. The seat belt extender retracts again in the fol- lowing cases: R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle R The seat belt tongue is not engaged in the
seat belt buckle within 60 seconds
If you press the õ seat belt extender but- ton again in this case, the seat belt extender will extend again. R The respective door is opened R You fold the seat backrest forwards R Nobody is sitting in the front passenger seat If you press the õ seat belt extender but- ton again in this case, the seat belt extender will no longer extend. The seat belt extender must always be retracted while the vehicle is in motion.
Fastening seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can- not be pulled out any further.
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor- responding seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air- bag shutoff:
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff:
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device when the frontpassenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied frontpassenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems.
Occupant safety 41
# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: After a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys- tem (/ page 41).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment.
42 Occupant safety
Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the instru- ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu- pants must wear their seat belts correctly. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened.
R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Airbags Overview of airbags
1 Driver's knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Front passenger knee airbag 5 Window curtain airbag 6 Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head
and ribcage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat
occupants
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe- cific information (/ page 60). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).
* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Protective capacity of the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor- rectly fastened seat belt.
Occupant safety 43
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro- tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
44 Occupant safety
passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa- tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 89). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other- wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 52). R Always store and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow- ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air- bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air- bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy- ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi- cations to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 42). & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the use of unsuitable seat covers Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten- ded.
In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond- ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per- formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. # Always have work on the doors or door
trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro- tection.
# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys- tem. The front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled accordingly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys- tem.
Occupant safety 45
# Do not store any objects under the codriver seat.
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi-
tioned correctly (/ page 51). R Always comply with the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust-
ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be
46 Occupant safety
resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina- tion and the head restraint setting accord- ingly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func- tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut- off. # Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint system. # The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat. # The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi-
ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 37). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos-
sible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow- ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the sitting sur- face.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas- sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 47).
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica- tor lamps Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.
Occupant safety 47
The status of the front passenger airbag is dis- played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may
deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx- imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa- bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag
48 Occupant safety
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta- tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con- tinuously.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air- bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe- cific information (/ page 60). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If
necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe- cific information (/ page 60). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con- tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond- ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the classifica- tion. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per- son of smaller stature should use a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.
Occupant safety 49
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seat belt.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 60)
50 Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® system PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protec- tion)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv- ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas- ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas- ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: Move the
front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increase the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi- media system is switched on, generates a
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro- tective mechanism of a person's hearing.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi- tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your- self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
is stationary. This brake application is can- celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol- lowing situations: R When backing up
The system will not initiate any braking applica- tion in the following situations: R Whilst driving
or R When entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the
specific situation. In this way you can recog- nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil- dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 52). Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri- ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur- ing a child carefully before every journey.
To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri- ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal- ling a child restraint system.
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil- dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys- tem is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat
Occupant safety 51
R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Observe standards for child restraint sys- tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow- ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal-
52 Occupant safety
lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is favored. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys- tem (/ page 56).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.
Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo- site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer- vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor- rectly
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys- tem. # Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. # Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 56). - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 59).
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 61). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 60). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur- rent situation (/ page 47).
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
R Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not modify the child restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi- cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system.
Occupant safety 53
# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.
Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys- tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child
restraint systems that have been dam- aged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
54 Occupant safety
Avoid direct sunlight
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Protect the child restraint system, e.g. with a blanket. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo- sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi- cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic-
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 58).
Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt
Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt
Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 47). R Observe the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 45)
Activating or deactivating the special seal belt retractor of the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord-
ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seal belt retractor
again and correctly secure the child restraint system.
When enabled, the special seal belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.
Occupant safety 55
The seat belts on the following seats are equip- ped with a special seal belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
# To install a child restraint system: when installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the informa- tion in this Operator's Manual.
# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.
# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.
# To activate the special seal belt retrac- tor: pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seal belt retractor is activa- ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.
# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.
# To deactivate the special seal belt retrac- tor: press the release button of the seat belt buckle.
56 Occupant safety
# Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet.
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica- tor will be visible.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is exceeded
The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing systems may be overloaded and the child may not be restrained in the event of an acci- dent, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys-
tem together weigh more than the per- missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system that secures the child with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R In the manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions for the child restraint system used R On a label on the child restraint system, if present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow- ing: O When using a baby car seat in weight
group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys- tem. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. O You can have the head restraints of the rear seats removed and installed at a qualified specialist workshop. This may be necessary for the use of certain child restraint sys- tems. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
Occupant safety 57
1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket Before every journey, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi- cle. # Remove and store away covers 1.
58 Occupant safety
# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
# After removing the child seat, re-attach cov- ers 1.
Securing Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are installed
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended pro- tective function. This may also cause addi- tional injuries. # Always lock rear seat backrests after
installing Top Tether belts. # Observe the lock verification indicator.
If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica- tor will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCHtype (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 95).
# Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufactur- er's installation instructions.
not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4.
# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars.
# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting.
# Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com- ply with the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions.
# Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down- wards (/ page 95). Make sure that you do
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.
Occupant safety 59
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica- tor will be visible. When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O You can have the head restraints of the rear seats removed and installed by a qualified
60 Occupant safety
specialist workshop. This may be necessary for the use of certain child restraint sys- tems. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip- ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 55). # Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let.
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air- bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Occupant safety 61
Observe the specific instructions for the rear- ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 61). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 47). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena- bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat
When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 60). O Observe the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation and operating instruc- tions. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 55).
62 Occupant safety
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.
# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- ment.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the back edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let.
# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo- sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi- cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic-
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Child safety locks are available for the side win- dows in the rear passenger compartment.
# To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
Opening/closing the side window in the rear passenger compartment is possible: R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on
the driver's door R Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on
the corresponding rear door or driver's door
Occupant safety 63
Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat- tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten- ded or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat-
tended. # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier.
64 Opening and closing
SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields
# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.
Vehicle SmartKey 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the trunk lid
Opening and closing 65
Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the trunk lid 5 Panic alarm
Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the tailgate 5 Panic alarm
Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the rear-end door 5 Panic alarm
% If indicator lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the Ü or ß button, the bat- tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Replacing the SmartKey battery (/ page 67).
66 Opening and closing
The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R the doors R fuel filler flap R trunk lid If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Antitheft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec- tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.
Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Requirements: R The ignition is switched off.
# To activate: press button 1 for approx- imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
# To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit,
with the SmartKey inside the vehicle.
Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
# To switch between settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating the SmartKey functions If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press the ß button on the
SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
# To activate: press any button on the Smart- Key.
% When the vehicle is started with the Smart- Key in the storage compartment of the cen- ter console, the SmartKey functions are automatically activated (/ page 142).
Removing/inserting the emergency key Removing the emergency key
# Press release knob 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
# Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position.
# Press release knob 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2.
Inserting the emergency key # Press release knob 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages. % You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Opening and closing 67 # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
68 Opening and closing Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 67).
# Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compart- ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat- tery when doing this.
# Push in battery compartment 3. # Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
engages.
Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot- ing
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 64).
# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 67).
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 71).
# Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam- ple: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or auto- matic barriers
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.
You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified
specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
Opening and closing 69
The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY-
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY- LESS-GO Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
# Pull door handle. 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked.
# To unlock: press button 1. # To lock: press button 2.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
70 Opening and closing
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- face of the door handle.
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen- sor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed.
% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 80).
If you open the trunk lid from outside, the trunk lid is automatically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva-
ted. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.
# Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66).
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 64).
# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 67).
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 71).
# Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or auto- matic barriers
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock- ing feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- ing faster than walking pace.
# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow started/
pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer.
Power closing function
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically
Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects
are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be
canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.
If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.
Opening and closing 71 Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv- er's door using the emergency key.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 67).
72 Opening and closing
# Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover.
# Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. # Release the door handle.
# To unlock: turn the emergency key counterclockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin- der until it engages and is seated firmly.
* NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta- cles above the vehicle
The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi-
cient clearance above the trunk lid.
Trunk Opening the trunk lid
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.
# With the trunk lid unlocked, press the top of the Mercedes star.
% To open, pull on the folded-out Mercedes star when the rear view camera is activated.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 75).
Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing
# Pull trunk lid remote operating switch 1. # Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey.
# If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. With the trunk lid opening height restriction activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid upwards.
If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
Closing the trunk lid
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Opening and closing 73
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug- gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han-
dle recess and push it closed. Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid
Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nothing is located within
the vicinity of the closing area. # Use one of the following options to stop
the closing process: R Press the p button on the
SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating
switch on the driver's door.
74 Opening and closing
R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid.
R Press the top of the star on the trunk lid.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.
# Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han- dle recess and push it closed.
# If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. The trunk lid will continue to close.
# Press trunk lid remote operating switch 1.
# Press closing button 1 on the trunk lid.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the trunk lid.
If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be locked. # With the trunk lid completely open, press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehi- cle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS # With the trunk lid completely opened, make a
kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 75).
Trunk lid automatic reversing function The trunk lid is equipped with automatic block- age detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle stops the trunk lid during the automatic closing procedure, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentive- ness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R towards the end of the closing procedure
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap- ped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the
closing area. # If someone is trapped, use one of the
following options: R Press the p button on the
SmartKey. R Press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button
on the trunk lid. R Press the top of the Mercedes star
on the trunk lid.
Opening and closing 75 HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 72) and closing (/ page 73) the trunk lid.
76 Opening and closing
% A warning tone sounds while the trunk lid is opening or closing.
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid
R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
that the SmartKey located is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle in such situations.
When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move- ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.
1 Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros-
thetic leg.
The trunk lid could be opened or closed uninten- tionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the
sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi- cle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.
Switching separate trunk locking on or off If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate locking is activated, the trunk will remain locked.
# To switch on: slide the switch to position 1.
# To switch off: slide the switch to position 2.
% If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on.
Opening and closing 77 Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and
charged.
# Press emergency release button 1 briefly.
78 Opening and closing
Side windows Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, release the but- ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper- ate the side windows, particularly when unat- tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the
rear passenger compartment side win- dows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
1 To close 2 To open
The buttons on the driver's door take prece- dence. # To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.
When the vehicle is switched off, you can con- tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side win- dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin-
gers.
R During resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions. # During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
Opening and closing 79
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
# Press and hold the Ü button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button.
# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again.
80 Opening and closing
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win- dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature
is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Press and hold the ß button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button.
# To close the roller sunblinds: press and hold the ß button again.
% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 69).
Resolving problems with the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to reopen the side window.
A side window cannot be closed and you can- not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the
window guide. # Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor-
responding button again until the side win- dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor-
responding button again until the side win- dow has closed and hold the button for at
least one more second (follow-up adjust- ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea- ture. Possible cause: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 64). # Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 67).
Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil- dren
Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.
Opening and closing 81
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the roller sun- blind's range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
82 Opening and closing
* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun- roof may damage the sealing strips. # Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
* NOTE Important points to remember when a roof luggage rack is installed
When a roof luggage rack is installed, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limi- ted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can
be raised or opened when a roof lug- gage rack is installed.
# If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.
1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower
Use the 3 button to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be
raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed. # To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. # To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stop- ped.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur- ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic revers- ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active
In particular, the reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin-
gers. R Towards the end of the closing proce-
dure. R During resetting.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind dur- ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers- ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move- ment.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin- gers.
Opening and closing 83
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered
84 Opening and closing
slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for- wards or backwards.
% By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving" and "Auto- matic lowering".
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi- ately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun- blind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
Roller sun blinds Extending or retracting the rear-window roller sunblind
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind
Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the
range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, briefly
press the button again. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects
Objects may cause the roller sunblind to mal- function. # Do not store any objects on the parcel
shelf. # Make sure that the roller sunblind can
move freely.
Opening and closing 85
# To extend or retract: press button 1.
Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart- Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
86 Opening and closing
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the trunk lid is opened R When the hood is opened R When the interior motion sensor is triggered
(/ page 87) R When the tow-away alarm is triggered
(/ page 87)
The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa- tions: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart-
Key R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 142)
% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto- matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 259).
% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.
Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart-
Key in the marked space (/ page 142)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the
SmartKey outside the vehicle.
Function of the tow-away alarm
% This function may not be available in all countries.
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol- lowing components are closed: R The doors R The trunk lid
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva- ted: R After pressing the Ü or p button on
the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 142)
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 166).
Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow- ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm.
Opening and closing 87
Function of the interior motion sensor
% This function may not be available in all countries.
When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move- ment is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is activated automati- cally after approximately ten seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R The doors R The trunk lid
The interior motion sensor is automatically deac- tivated: R After pressing the Ü or p button on
the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 142)
88 Opening and closing
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R Moving objects such as mascots in the vehi-
cle interior R When the side window is open R When the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate the interior motion sensor.
Arming/deactivating the interior motion sen- sor
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sen-
sor. The interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi- cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas- ten your seat belt.
Seats and stowing 89
Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration. R You are sitting in an upright position. R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion.
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly.
R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint.
R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
R You can move your legs freely. R You can see all the displays on the instru-
ment cluster clearly. R You have a good overview of the traffic con-
ditions. R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
and passes across the center of your shoul- der and across your hips in the pelvic area.
90 Seats and stowing
Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically and electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi- cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas- ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com-
mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
Seats and stowing 91
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make
sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
92 Seats and stowing
Adjusting the front seat mechanically and electrically (with Seat Comfort Package)
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 4 and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
5 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-aft position
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position 5 Seat cushion length
Adjusting the front seat electrically 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat cushion inclination 6 Seat fore-and-aft position
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 104).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1 Higher 2 Softer 3 Lower 4 Firmer
Seats and stowing 93
# Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back.
Head restraints Adjusting the head restraints on the front seats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi- cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas- ten your seat belt.
94 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob 1 and push
the head restraint down. # Ensure that the head restraint is engaged
correctly.
# To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.
# To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards.
# Ensure that the head restraint is engaged correctly.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down. # Ensure that the head restraint is properly engaged.
Configuring the seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort
Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side Bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.
Setting the seat heating balance # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired
seat.
Seats and stowing 95
Setting automatic seat adjustment
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi- tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of
driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move- ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or
96 Seats and stowing
# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop- ped.
Requirements: R Adapting the driver's seat position to the
body size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment Switching automatic seat adjustment on/off When the active user profile is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, out- side mirror and seat contour will automatically be adapted to the driver. # Select On or Off. % This setting is available only for individual user profiles. For the guest profile, auto- matic seat adjustment cannot be switched
on or off. Further information about user profiles .
Adjusting the driver's seat position to body size The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat position on the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm
or ft/in. # Set the size using the scale. # Select Start Positioning.
The driver's seat position will be adjusted to the body size that has been set. % If the driver's seat position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be changed manually at any time via the but- tons. The outside mirrors are not set via this func- tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches. % You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the vehicle and
the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronizing user profiles .
Setting the easy entry and exit feature # Activate or deactivate the function. % If you use an individual user profile and have
set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat to automatically move into the correct position .
Overview of massage programs The following programs can be selected: R Relaxing Massage It starts by massaging the
back, beginning in the pelvic area. R Activating Massage Activating massage with
upward-moving massage waves. R Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. R Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing Massage with
upward-moving massage waves. Can pro- mote slower, deeper respiration. This can
improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.
Selecting the massage program for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High
Intensity on or off .
Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select ß for the desired seat. # Confirm the prompt.
Folding the front seat backrest forwards/ back (vehicles with memory function) If you fold the seat backrest forwards, the seat will move forwards with the EASY-ENTRY func-
tion. This allows passengers to get into and out of the rear passenger compartment comfortably. # To fold forwards: pull seat release handle
1 and fold the seat backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat will move automatically to the fore- most position.
Seats and stowing 97
# To fold back: swing back the seat backrest horizontally. If the seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. The seat will move automatically to the stored position.
Switching the seat heating on/off
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat- edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi- ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec- ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
98 Seats and stowing
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over- heating may occur due to objects or docu- ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush- ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu-
ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.
% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.
Setting the panel heating Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armr- ests and the center console can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on
or off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
Seats and stowing 99
Switching AIRSCARF on/off
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by the heating output from AIRSCARF being too high
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the outlet opening in the head restraints. # Turn the heating output down in good
time. # Maintain a suitable distance from the
outlet opening.
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
100 Seats and stowing
AIRSCARF uses heated air to warm the head and neck area of vehicle occupants. The warm air flows out of the vents in the head restraints. # Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired
heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all the indica- tor lamps are off, AIRSCARF is switched off.
% When switching on, the blower will start up only after a preheating phase lasting a few seconds. After switching off, the blower will continue to run for a few seconds to cool down the heating elements.
% If the vehicle battery voltage is too low, AIR- SCARF may switch off.
# Adjusting the AIRSCARF vent (/ page 138).
Make sure that there are no objects covering the air intake on the back of the head restraint. Make sure that objects do not enter the air inlet and outlet grilles in the head restraints.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi- cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas- ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil- dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.
# To lock: push release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
# Check and make sure that the steering col- umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.
Seats and stowing 101
# To unlock: push release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height # Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 104).
102 Seats and stowing Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
# Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.
Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc-
ess is complete before pulling away.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature
You and other vehicle occupants particu- larly children could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in
the sweep of the steering wheel or driv- er's seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the adjustment lever of the steer-
ing wheel. The adjustment process will be stop- ped.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process will be stop- ped. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles with memory function: You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature
Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu- larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv- er's seat will move back in the following situa- tions: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's
door open. R You open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off.
% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards
Seats and stowing 103
only if it is not already in the rearmost posi- tion. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol- lowing cases: R You switch the power supply or the ignition on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door with the ignition switched on.
The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch the ignition off. R Vehicles with memory function: You call
up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with memory function: You save
the seat settings via the memory function.
Vehicles with memory function: Press one of the memory function memory position switches to stop the adjustment process.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function.
Memory function Function of the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv- er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station- ary.
104 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set- ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu- larly children could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the
memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. # If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust- ment switch immediately.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the igni- tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display
Operating the memory function Storing
# Set the desired position for all systems. # Briefly press the V memory button and
then press preset position 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.
# To call up: press or briefly hold preset posi- tion button 4, T or U. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.
Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Seats and stowing 105
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.
# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu- pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
106 Seats and stowing
could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi-
cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the
liquid is hot.
* NOTE Damage to the handle in the trunk floor
If the handle in the trunk is left protruding, the handle may be damaged. # Before closing the trunk lid, detach the
handle and press it down closed again.
* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart- ment under the ashtray due to intense heat
The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it.
# Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga- rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail- pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci- fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front storage compartments
1 Storage space in the doors 2 Storage compartment in the armrest with
USB ports and storage space, e.g. for an MP3 player
3 Storage compartment in the front center console with a USB port
4 Glove box
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold) Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
Rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest can fold forwards. R As a result, the vehicle occupant is
pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protec- tive function and could cause additional injuries. R Objects or loads in the trunk cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
Seats and stowing 107
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
Requirements: R The rear seat backrest head restraints are
fully inserted. You can fold the center and outer seat backrests forwards separately.
108 Seats and stowing
# Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one section of the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision.
# To fold the left and right seat backrests forwards: pull release lever 1.
# To fold the center seat backrest for- wards: pull release catch 3 of seat back- rest 2 forwards.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for- wards.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat back- rest.
# Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one part of the seat backrest in the rear passenger compartment is folded back, the corresponding front seat will automatically return to the most recent original position.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible.
Locking the release catch of the center rear seat backrest Requirements: R The left and center seat backrests are
engaged and joined together. You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the trunk against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest.
Seats and stowing 109 This equipment is only available in vehicles with the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat.
# Fold the center and left seat backrests for- wards.
# To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 up or down.
Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 105).
1 Tie-down eyes
110 Seats and stowing
Using the bag hooks
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
# Pull bag hook 2 down by tab 1. % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 105).
Attaching the parcel net
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. # Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
# Fold up the tie-down eyes. # Hook parcel net 1 into the front and rear
tie-down eyes.
Attaching a roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load
The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from nonapproved roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug- gage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
Seats and stowing 111
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is installed.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the trunk lid can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is installed.
# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
* NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is installed
The sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when a roof luggage rack is installed. # Do not open the sliding sunroof when a
roof luggage rack is installed. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof.
112 Seats and stowing
* NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects. # Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the
direction of the arrow.
# Secure the screws of the screw-on roof lug- gage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1 in compliance with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manu- facturer.
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
Sockets Using the 12 V socket
Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console. In addition, depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console.
Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console
# Briefly press the trim element of the cover on the front. The cover opens in the direction of the arrow.
# Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device.
If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compart- ment open.
USB port in the rear passenger compartment
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment: R In the front storage compartment R In the storage compartment under the front
armrest R In the rear passenger compartment center
console R In the storage compartment in the rear arm-
rest
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the storage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear passenger compartment center console may vary.
If the ignition is switched on you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. The devices can be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A) and when the ignition is switched on.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can-
not be thrown around in such situa- tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
Seats and stowing 113
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart- ment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not
place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.
114 Seats and stowing
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor- age compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage
devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart- ment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module.
R The charging function and wireless connec- tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni- tion is switched on.
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment.
R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna.
R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile phone storage compart- ment when the air conditioning system is switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone storage compartment is high- est when the controller in the glove box is closed.
R To ensure more efficient charging and con- nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone.
R When charging, the mat should be used if possible.
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com
# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen- ter of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
Installing and removing the floor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# To install: press studs 1 onto holders 2. # To remove: pull the floor mat off holders 2.
Seats and stowing 115
116 Light and visibility
Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch Operating light switches
1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps and license plate lamp 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog lamp on or off When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi-
cient lighting, in accordance with the rele- vant legal stipulations.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand- ing lamps or parking lamps will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and park- ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting
(/ page 124). Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run- ning lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi- ent light.
& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi-
tion. # Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
Light and visibility 117 Operating the combination switch for the lights
1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left # Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
118 Light and visibility
Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position. # Push the combination switch beyond the
point of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva- ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.
Switching off high beam # Move the combination switch back to its
starting position.
High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 3.
Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.
# To indicate permanently: push the combi- nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
# Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto- matically if: R The airbag has been deployed.
Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
Intelligent Light System function (Canada) The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide exten- ded functions for improved illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 119) R Cornering light (/ page 119) R Highway mode (/ page 120) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 120) R Adverse weather light (/ page 120) R City lighting (/ page 120)
The system is active only when it is dark.
Active headlamps function (Canada)
Functions of the active headlamps: R The headlamps follow the steering move-
ments. R Relevant areas are better illuminated during
a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.
Light and visibility 119 Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc- tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned
120 Light and visibility Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersec- tion. Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and bright- ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil- ity.
The function is active if a freeway journey is detected by means of: R The vehicle's speed
R The multifunction camera R Or the navigation system The function is not active in the following cases: R At speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces reflec- tions and improves the illumination of the edge of the road.
The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and
when the rear fog light is switched on.
The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R At speeds above 62 mph (100 km/h) after
activation. R When the rear fog light is switched off.
Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are blinded less as a result.
The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of road- sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas
Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off (Canada)
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Intelligent Light System # Activate or deactivate the function.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes-
trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late.
Light and visibility 121
In these, or in similar situations, the auto- matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic
conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi- tions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically.
122 Light and visibility
The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient
The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-
tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the multifunction display.
Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina-
tion switch.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada)
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes-
trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recog- nize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto- matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf- fic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam
ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright- ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not blind them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is sufficient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will
be switched off automatically.
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will be switched on automatically.
At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h): R If no other road users are detected on a
straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will be switched on automatically.
Light and visibility 123
R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off auto- matically.
The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off (Canada) Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-
tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat- ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display will light up. Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina- tion switch.
124 Light and visibility
Setting the low beam (vehicles with MULTI- BEAM LED headlamps only) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Low-beam Headlamps # Select Right-side Traffic, Left-side Traffic or
Automatic.
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Daytime Run. Lights # Switch the function on or off.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time.
When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.
Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting
Switching the surround lighting on/off
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur- round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.
# 1 p Switches the front left reading lamp on/off
# 2 | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off
# 3 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off
# 4 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
# 5 p Switches the front right reading lamp on/off
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Lighting
Setting the color # Select Color. # Set the desired color.
Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.
Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Activate or deactivate the function. or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.
Activating multi-color lighting # Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination.
Activating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation.
The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals.
Activating welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome.
When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi- ent lighting sequence will run.
Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Color. # Select Climate.
If changes are made to the temperature set- ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly.
Light and visibility 125
Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off.
When this function is active, the interior light- ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.
126 Light and visibility Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off
1 g Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent
4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast # Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position 1 - 5. # Single wipe/washing: push the button on
the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wipes with washer fluid
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and then off again
immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold
the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 126). The wiper arms will move into the replace- ment position.
Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
shield.
Installing the wiper blades
Light and visibility 127
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind- shield.
# Switch on the ignition. # Press the î button on the combination
switch. The wiper arms will return to the original position. # Switch the ignition off. Maintenance display The maintenance display is available only with standard windshield wipers.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- rectly.
128 Light and visibility
Replacing the windshield wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)
Moving the wiper arms to the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and switch off again
immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold
the î button on the combination switch for approximately 3 seconds (/ page 126). The wiper arms will move into the replace- ment position.
Removing the wiper blades
# Remove protective film 1 from the mainte- nance display on the tip of the newly instal- led wiper blades.
When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. % The duration until the color changes varies
depending on the usage conditions.
# To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: raise the wiper arm away from the windshield and hold it with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 1 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.
# To remove the wiper blade: press release knob 2, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 3 and remove.
Installing the wiper blades
# Press the wiper blade beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 3 on the wiper arm. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again.
# Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. # Switch on the ignition. # Press the î button on the combination
switch (/ page 126). The wiper arms will move into the original position.
Light and visibility 129
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi- cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas- ten your seat belt.
# Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob 2 engages.
130 Light and visibility
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul-
der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.
Folding the outside mirrors in/out
Adjusting the outside mirrors # Press button 3 or 4 to select the outside
mirror to be adjusted. # Press button 2 to adjust the position of the
mirror glass.
Engaging the outside mirrors # Vehicles without electrically folding outside
mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir- rors: press and hold button 1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi- bly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.
# Briefly press button 1.
Resetting the outside mirrors % If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. # Briefly press button 1.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors function
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi- soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec- trolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con- tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro-
lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir- ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.
Light and visibility 131
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans-
mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi- tion function
The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 132). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.
132 Light and visibility
Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing
Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2. # Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or off.
# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
Climate control 133
Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control An interior air filter in combination with the pre- filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu- tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of the air conditioning control panel The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate con- trol with/without stationary heater (example) 1 w Sets the temperature, left 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate
control 4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic
(/ page 134) 5 ¬ Defrosts the windshield
6 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control (without station- ary heater): t calls up the air condition- ing menu Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control (with stationary heater) or 3-zone automatic climate control (with/without stationary heater): ! calls up the air conditioning menu, switches resid- ual heat on/off (/ page 136)
7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off
8 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control without stationary heater: 0 switches synchronization on/off (/ page 135) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone auto- matic climate control without stationary heater: ¿ switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 134) Vehicles with a stationary heater: & switches the stationary heater on/off
9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 136)
134 Climate control A Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone
automatic climate control: ¿ switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 134) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone auto- matic climate control: _ adjusts the air distribution, right B w Sets the temperature, right Rear operating unit in vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
1 Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 Sets the airflow
Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off # To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H button. # To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
the H button. If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.
Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the ¿ button. Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other- wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction.
Calling up the air conditioning menu Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the
lower edge of the media display.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Call up the air-conditioning menu
(/ page 134). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select A/C.
Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con- trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button.
# To switch to manual mode: press the H or _ button.
Climate style Climate style function The following climate styles are available in auto- matic mode: R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and
draft-free setting
Adjusting the climate mode settings # Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 134). # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of
Seats. # Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu. # Select a climate style.
Setting the air distribution # Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 134). # Select a row of seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯,
P or O. # Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec-
ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously. The ¯ climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row.
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the air condi- tioning control panel Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side.
Climate control 135
# Press the 0 button. The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate con- trol zones are changed.
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the multimedia system Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 134). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC.
Removing condensation from the windows Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the à button.
136 Climate control
# If the windows continue to fog up: press the ¬ button.
Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching the residual heat on or off Requirements: R The vehicle is parked. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat-
ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. # To switch on: press the ! button. Residual heat is switched off automatically.
Activating/deactivating ionization Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor- less. # Call up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 134). # Select Air Quality. # Select IONIZATION.
Fragrance system Setting the fragrance system Requirements: R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed.
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra- grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla- con located in the glove box. # Call up the climate control menu
(/ page 134). # Select Air Quality. # Select AIR FRESHENER. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is
reached.
Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra- grance system
& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per- fume
If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con- tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk.
# If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full flacons
Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste.
#
Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.
Climate control 137
Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. Refillable flacon # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.
(15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa- tion sheet with the flacon.
1 Cap 2 Flacon
# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
# To remove: pull out the flacon.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.
Air vents Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.
138 Climate control
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the
vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up
(/ page 276).
# To open or close: hold the air vent 1 in the center and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
# To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the center and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Adjusting the AIRSCARF vents
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by the heating output from AIRSCARF being too high
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the outlet opening in the head restraints. # Turn the heating output down in good
time. # Maintain a suitable distance from the
outlet opening.
* NOTE Damage caused to AIRSCARF by the use of protective covers
If a protective cover is placed over the front seat head restraints, the flow of air from the AIRSCARF vent is hindered. This can cause AIRSCARF to overheat and be damaged. # Do not use protective covers on head
restraints with AIRSCARF.
Make sure that there are no objects covering the air inlet grille on the back of the head restraints.
# You can adjust the blower setting of AIR- SCARF vents 1 using the AIRSCARF button (/ page 99).
# You can adjust the height of AIRSCARF vents 1 and the current of air by adjusting the height of the head restraints (/ page 93).
Climate control 139
140 Driving and parking
Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognize dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends
on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R Emotion Start R AMG Performance exhaust system R AMG ceramic high-performance composite
brake system R DRIFT MODE R AMG adaptive sport suspension system + R AMG steering-wheel buttons
Switching on the power supply or ignition
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog-
nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed.
# To switch on the power supply: press but- ton 1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol- lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more.
# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within
15 minutes and the transmission is in posi- tion j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once.
Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but- ton
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
Driving and parking 141
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.
Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog-
nized. # Shift the transmission to position j or i. # Depress the brake pedal and press button
1 once. # If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
essential consumers and press button 1 once.
142 Driving and parking
# If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message also appears in the multifunction display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 142).
% You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button 1 for about three sec- onds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 145).
Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
# Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. # Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2.
The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked space 2 the engine continues running. For further vehicle starts however, SmartKey 1 must be located in marked space 2 during the entire journey. # Have SmartKey 1checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 and
leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi-
cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv- ices
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap- ment due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.
# Always secure the engine against unin- tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched
off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecu- tive starting attempts. You must start the vehicle once with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. you can stop the vehicle again at any time.
Driving and parking 143
% Further information can be found in the smartphone app.
Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Breaking-in notes To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph
(140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive program A
or ;. R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat-
est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer.
144 Driving and parking
R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake.
R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle.
R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).
R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1000 miles (1500 km).
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer- tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys- tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are either new or have been replaced only ach- ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com-
pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on optimized acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation con- ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera- tion can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa- tion on ESP® (/ page 170).
Pulling away with optimized acceleration
& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use optimized acceleration, indi- vidual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.
If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid- ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in
(/ page 143). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway. R The engine and transmission are at normal
operating temperature.
* NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration
When pulling away with optimized accelera- tion, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized
acceleration.
# Engage the h drive position (/ page 156).
# Move the steering wheel to the straightahead position.
# Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 153).
# Deactivate ESP® (/ page 171). # Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with
your left foot. # With your right foot, fully depress the accel-
erator pedal. # After no more than five seconds, take your
left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera- tion. # Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce- dure is complete.
Ending optimized acceleration # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®. % After you pull away with optimized accelera-
tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that opti-
mized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.
Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
Driving and parking 145
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers # Always wear suitable footwear so that
you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv-
ing.
146 Driving and parking
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur-
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi- sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run- ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi- cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco- hol and drugs while driving
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over- heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal
# Do not depress the brake pedal contin- uously whilst driving.
# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi- ately.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Driving and parking 147
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata- lytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next journey
Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip- itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 304).
148 Driving and parking
Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the
lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi- cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.
The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
ECO start/stop function
Operation of the ECO start/stop function % The ECO start/stop function is not available
in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the multifunction display for this. The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans- mission position h or i. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed.
If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi-
cle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you
starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel
sharply or engage reverse gear.
% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.
The engine is restarted automatically if: R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the
vehicle. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
system:
- You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll.
- The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h).
ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi- function display: R The è symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi- tions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the è nor ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli- gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R The s symbol appears: the ECO start/ stop function is deactivated or there is a mal- function.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn- ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the multifunction display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting
If you do not switch off the ignition, it is auto- matically switched off after three minutes. Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function
# Press button 1. If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is activated.
Driving and parking 149
% Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the center console.
ECO display function The ECO display summarizes your driving char- acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the fol- lowing: R Drive with particular care R Follow the gearshift recommendations
150 Driving and parking
The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adop- ted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adop- ted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration
The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will fill up completely at
the same time R The edges around all three segments will
light up
The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the center of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.
ECO Assist function Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys- tem (EQ Boost technology): ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec- ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead, e.g. a speed limit or a roundabout, it will appear on the multifunction display. The following symbols can be displayed:
Examples of an event ahead 1 Event ahead 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot off the accelerator" prompt
The segments of distance display 2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows: R A few segments light up: the event ahead is
near. R Many segments light up: the event ahead is
further away.
When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and gradient. The Foot off the Accelerator message 3 appears on the multifunction display. The first segments in front of the vehicle will turn green. The remaining seg- ments will initially stay white. If the driver takes their foot off the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will suc- cessively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recuperation will charge the bat- tery. Recuperation will be adapted to the selec- ted drive program. The event will be shown for a short time after it has been passed. If there is no response to the
Foot off the Accelerator prompt, the segments will remain white. If the event involves a vehicle in front, all seg- ments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt. For active ECO Assist in drive program ;, symbol 3 will appear on the multifunction dis- play and on the Head-up Display beside trans- mission position h. Symbol 3 will also appear when the assistant display is not selected. If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The sys- tem will be passive. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A.
System limits ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available with- out active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The qual- ity depends on the map data.
Driving and parking 151
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi- ble for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system intervenes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illu-
mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R If traffic signs are hard to discern, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured. R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
152 Driving and parking
Displaying ECO Assist On-board computer: 4 DriveAssist # Select ECO Assist.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multi- function display of the on-board computer. = Individual R Individual settings
B Sport+ R Particularly sporty driving R Emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering
and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road
C Sport R Continues to offer stability but with a sporty
setup R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving
style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions
; Eco R Particularly economical driving
R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions
Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive:
- Engine and transmission management - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP® R Electric power steering
Selecting the drive program # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.
Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I # Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category.
Switching the restoration display on or off # Switch Request at Start on or off.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi- tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is star- ted the A drive program is set automatically.
Driving and parking 153
The ECO start/stop function is activated auto- matically. % This function must be activated for each user
profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.
Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed.
154 Driving and parking
% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor- que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam- ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine
% The values displayed serve only as orienta- tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.
Calling up the consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption.
The current and average consumption is dis- played.
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi- tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display.
j Park position k Reverse gear
i Neutral h Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. % To shift into neutral i with the ignition on, push the selector lever up or down for sev- eral seconds to the first point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Driving and parking 155
# Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the
SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans- mission remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 160). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is
at a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but-
ton j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.
156 Driving and parking
Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle
is stationary and the transmission position is h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k.
% To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again.
Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmis- sion position h, it shifts the gears automati- cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal
R The driving speed Manual gearshifting
When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto- matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting
The gears shift automatically when manual gear- shifting is deactivated. Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1 or 2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear.
% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti- vated is dependent on various factors. Manual gearshifting can be automatically deactivated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission position h is engaged again R Driving style
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.
# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h.
Permanent setting: # Change to drive program =(/ page 153). # Select drive setting p (/ page 153).
Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.
# If gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.
Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel-
erator pedal beyond the pressure point. To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.
Glide mode function
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.
Driving and parking 157
Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is
shown in green. R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical
system (EQ-Boost technology): the com- bustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi- tions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. R you do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.
158 Driving and parking
Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow- ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation
Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over- ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe- cially for maintaining a safe distance from the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.
Refueling Refueling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel
R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi- cles with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving and parking 159
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the
160 Driving and parking fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased.
1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tire pressure table 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Stationary heater indication 6 Fuel type
# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it. # Insert the fuel filler cap from above into
bracket 2. # Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off. # Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly. # Close fuel filler flap 1.
Parking Parking the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi- cle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi- ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.
# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.
# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to position j.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass- land or harvested grain fields.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
# Always secure the vehicle against roll- ing away.
* NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lower- ing
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer nonoperational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when
driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.
Driving and parking 161
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
162 Driving and parking
# Engage transmission position j in a station- ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 155).
# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button 1.
# Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.
Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener
When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. # Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of movement of the door.
Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea-
ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S.
safety standards
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
% The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.
# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)
# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi- cator lamp flashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
# Point remote control 6 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3.
# Press and hold button 5 of remote control 6 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin- uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro- gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects
are located outside the range of movement of the door.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
Driving and parking 163
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com- pleted.
% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 6 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 6. # Hold remote control 6 at various angles
from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 6 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
164 Driving and parking
# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 5 on remote control 6 again before transmission ends.
# Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control.
% Support and additional information on pro- gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes
Opening or closing the garage door
Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted.
Electric parking brake Function of the electric parking brake (apply- ing automatically)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans- mission is in position j and one of the follow- ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 165).
Driving and parking 165
In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: - You shift from transmission position j.
- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying
166 Driving and parking
# Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica- tor lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu- ously.
Releasing # Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle 1.
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica- tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can- ada) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster.
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged. R The force of the impact.
The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-
story garage.
% Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti- vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated.
% If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked
vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili- tate the next engine start.
System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit- uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.
if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a SmartKey R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied
Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam- aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat- tery's period out of use)
Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-oper- ation. Standby mode is characterised by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears
in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup-
ted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail-
able. R The interior motion sensor and tow-away
alarm functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a
parked vehicle is not available.
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera- tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can- not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be
extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby
Mode message appears in the media display.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (park- ing the vehicle for an extended period)
Requirements: R The engine is switched off.
Driving and parking 167
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes.
Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu- vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always
168 Driving and parking take into account road, weather or traffic condi- tions.
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
% The radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the Mercedes star.
1 Cameras in the outside mirrors 2 Multifunction camera 3 Front camera 4 Ultrasonic sensors 5 Rear view camera
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi- cle sensors and cameras
If the area around vehicle sensors or cam- eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors
or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 280). The sensors and cameras may not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the windshield and rear window repaired at a qualified specialist work- shop.
Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(/ page 169) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 169)
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 170)
R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 171) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 171) R STEER CONTROL (/ page 172) R HOLD function (/ page 172) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 173) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 173) R Cruise control (/ page 175) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 194) R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 202) R AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 203)
Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 177)
Driving and parking 169
R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend- ent) (/ page 182)
R Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 183)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 189) R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 185) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-
dependent) (/ page 187) R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend-
ent) (/ page 188) R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend-
ent) (/ page 184) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
with exit warning (/ page 198) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 200)
Parking Package R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 211) R Rear view camera (/ page 205) R Surround view camera (/ page 207) R Active Parking Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 215)
Function of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application
or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
Function of BAS The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres-
sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
170 Driving and parking
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Function of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
ESP® can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits: R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. R When braking.
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
% When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis- ted by ESP® when braking.
When the ÷ warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary when pulling away.
Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu- ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 395) R Display messages (/ page 348)
Driving and parking 171
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif- ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 153).
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi- cle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ- ual brake application on one side.
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta- bility Program) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated
using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
# Select ESP. # Select On or å Off. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.
Function of EBD Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char- acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
172 Driving and parking
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol- lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid
System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.
HOLD function
HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand- still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi- bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.
System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always secure the vehicle against roll- ing away before you leave it.
Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati-
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated. R The transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short
time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the multifunction display. # Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis-
play disappears from the multifunction dis- play. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow- ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- ted. R The transmission is shifted to position j.
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park- ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the
power supply is insufficient.
Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol- lowing conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
Driving and parking 173
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto- nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati- gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.
174 Driving and parking
You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap- ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra- tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis- play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.
You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last
break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: - The fuller the circle, the higher the atten-
tional level determined - As your attention wanes, the circle in the
center of the display becomes smaller
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga- tion to this rest area. This function can be activa- ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN- TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man- ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx-
imately 30 minutes.
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor-
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre-
quently In active driving situations.
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continu- ing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.
Speed control cruise control Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
Driving and parking 175
foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167). MercedesAMG vehicles: Cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).
Displays on the multifunction display R h (gray): cruise control is selected but
not yet activated. R h (green): cruise control is active.
A stored speed appears along with the h dis- play. % The segments between the stored speed and
the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer.
176 Driving and parking
System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak- ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat- ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa- tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor.
Operating cruise control
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements: R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph
(20 km/h). R The transmission is in position h.
Steering wheel control panel for cruise control J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates cruise control M Activates cruise control N Deactivates cruise control 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed # To activate cruise control: press M.
Activating cruise control
# Press M or N on control panel 1. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.
or # Press J.
The last stored speed is called up and main- tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. Increasing/decreasing the stored speed
# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h).
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe down- wards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h).
or
# Briefly press M or N on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the following values depending on the unit: R mph: the next value ending in 5 R km/h: the next value ending in 0
or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press M on control panel 1. Adopting a detected speed If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is dis- played in the instrument cluster: # Press J.
The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed.
Deactivating cruise control # Press ±.
Driving and parking 177
Switching off cruise control # Press N. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main- tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend- ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack-
age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h)
178 Driving and parking
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h)
Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort- able or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) - Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (countrydependent)
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane,
separate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi- cle in front when driving off again within 30 sec- onds. If a critical situation is detected when driv- ing off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167).
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster Assistant display 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route
event (/ page 183) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis-
play
Driving and parking 179
Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set R k (white vehicle, green speedometer):
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected R k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected R r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 183).
The stored speed is shown along with the per- manent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the
green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli- cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas-
sive mode. The ç Suspended message appears in the multifunction display.
Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom- eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera- tions to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed, are displayed in the control feedback of the multi- function display on a single line.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel- erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler- ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
180 Driving and parking
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the traffic con- ditions and be ready to brake at all times.
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi- cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-
ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed.
J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates the variable limiter/Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC 1 Increases/decreases the speed
K Increases/decreases the specified dis- tance
H Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.
Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press H.
Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: on
control panel 1 press M on the upper section or N on the lower section or J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or
# To activate with a stored speed: press J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.
Increasing or reducing the speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards
from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph
(1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
wards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph
(1 km/h). or # Briefly press M on the upper section or
N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
Driving and parking 181
# Press M on the upper section of control panel 1.
Adopting the limit speed shown in the instru- ment cluster # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # Press J.
The limit speed displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press J. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
182 Driving and parking
Reducing or increasing the specified dis- tance from the vehicle in front # Press K.
The Ò display appears under the ç status display. The specified distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi- cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
# Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP®
intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If speed limit change between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 195). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda- ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom- mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom- mended speed. If you do not alter the stored
speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec- ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera- tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167).
System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 194). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi- cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer
# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti- vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord- ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti- ates a route event ahead in an economical, com- fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to
Driving and parking 183
the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 184). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll stations R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic
Information )
% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi- cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round- abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand- still. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off
before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed.
184 Driving and parking
The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the follow- ing situations: R The road's course not clearly visible R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi-
vidual lanes R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc- tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol- lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula-
ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions
R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
Setting route-based speed adaptation
Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted. R ECO Assist is active.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function.
When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead. % Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 183).
Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneu- vers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving sys- tems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 167). Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automati- cally as soon as all of the requirements are met: The ¬ status display appears in the instru- ment cluster when the function is active. Requirements: R You are in a traffic jam on a freeway or high-
speed major road.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- ted and active (/ page 180).
R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 189).
R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 187).
R Active Stop-and-Go Assist is activated (/ page 185).
R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 185).
Activating/deactivating Active Traffic Jam Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select ¬.
Driving and parking 185
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer- ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower
speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec- essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.
Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display R Ø (gray): activated and passive R Ø (green): activated and active
R Ø (red): system limits detected R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steer-
ing wheel" prompt
% During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as gray in the multifunction display.
% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter- vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.
186 Driving and parking
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer- ing wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes- sage. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 187). If the driver steers, no warning is issued, or the warning is ended.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167).
System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor- que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or at intersections.
R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll plazas. R When the tire pressure is too low.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func- tioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten-
tion to traffic conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select a Steering Assist.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
Driving and parking 187
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer- ing wheel, display 1 appears in the multifunc- tion display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warn- ing, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked.
188 Driving and parking
R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Lane Change Assist Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with
multiple lanes in the direction of travel.
R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro- ken lane marking.
R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The vehicle speed is between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in
the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active.
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has activated the turn sig- nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the ± steering wheel symbol. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the ± steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the multifunction display.
If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. The Lane Change Canceled message appears in the multifunction dis- play. In addition, a warning tone may sound, depend- ing on the situation.
& WARNING Risk of accident when chang- ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane
Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that
the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. # Monitor the lane change.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func- tioning
If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar- antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and
keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.
System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 185). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,
damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a defect.
% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Activate or deactivate the function.
Active Brake Assist Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance
Driving and parking 189
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis- tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica- tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak- ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max- imum full-stop braking if necessary.
190 Driving and parking Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167).
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec- essary.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn- ing in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi- ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.
Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi- cles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching crossing pedestrians
Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching moving pedes- trians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with- out Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph
(200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi- cles or moving pedestrians
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead
Driving and parking 191
R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles
R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack- age) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi- cles and vehicles ahead
192 Driving and parking
R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes- trians
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown R releasing the brake pedal
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli- cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac- teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving
pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving maneuver.
R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver.
R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.
R Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx- imately 43 mph (70 km/h).
You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering. Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv- ing Assistance Package) If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have left the lane in which you are driving.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva- sive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog- nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly.
Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec- essary. # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. # Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.
System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the Ä warning lamp appears in the multifunction display.
The system may be impaired or may not func- tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer- ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
Driving and parking 193
R On curves with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto-
matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in proc- ess. Setting Active Brake Assist Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the drive system is next started. Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.
194 Driving and parking
# Select Off. The distance warning function, the autono- mous braking function and the Evasive Steer- ing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.
Traffic Sign Assist Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 168). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric- tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter- mine whether the restriction applies. Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a
restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction % Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis-
play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display.
Driving and parking 195
If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maxi- mum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup- ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes-
sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 348). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc- tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog- ged up, damaged or covered.
R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting.
R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.
R If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.
Setting Traffic Sign Assist
Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating automatic adop- tion of speed limits (only vehicles with Driv- ing Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Activate or deactivate the function.
The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter
Further information (/ page 180).
Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in Central Display.
196 Driving and parking
# Activate or deactivate the function. Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off. Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed.
Overview of the traffic light data service
& WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data
The traffic light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation. # Keep the actual traffic situation con-
stantly in view when approaching a traf- fic light and when changing lanes.
# Avoid prolonged viewing of the Instru- ment Display and Head-up Display.
The Instrument Display and Head-up Display (if available) show the traffic light and remaining time 1 until the next green phase as a count- down.
Example representation in the Instrument Display The display is hidden about five seconds before the traffic lights change to green.
% The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning off before the intersection into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection
% The direction arrows are displayed depend- ing on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active route guidance
If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed. % Use of the traffic light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to Mercedes-Benz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwar- ded to the provider of the traffic light infor- mation service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted after a very short time (a few seconds) and are not per- manently saved.
If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the
Mercedes me Portal. R You have the service deactivated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R You deactivate the service in the Assis-
tance menu in the multimedia system (/ page 198). % This traffic light data service is only available in cities and regions countries. The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communi- cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account.
R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
R The traffic light data service is within the scope of the navigation service.
The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the traf- fic light data service provider. The provider gath- ers data from traffic lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an intersection with networked traffic lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal left or right and lane recom- mendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, sys- tems or components. Please note that the dis- played data is not available in all traffic areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current traffic situa-
Driving and parking 197
tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The information in the Instrument Display is shown after selecting the display contents in the Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, the traffic light countdown is not displayed. In addition, observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur-
roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula-
tions
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers.
System limits The display does not appear in the following sit- uations, for example: R There is no traffic light data available. R The time remaining until the next green
phase is less than ten seconds.
198 Driving and parking
R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection.
R The data transmission from the vehicle has been interrupted.
R Light signal systems are located in a con- struction site area or are being maintained.
R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired.
Switching the traffic light information dis- play on or off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Switch Traffic Light Information on D or
off E.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to
monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx- imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse- quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Permanent status display in the instrument clus- ter: R ¸ (gray): system is activated but inopera-
tive R ¸ (green): system is activated and opera-
tional
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor- responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation and maintain a safe dis- tance at the side of the vehicle.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog- nize dangers (/ page 167). Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu- pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear- ance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warn- ing is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni- tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times.
Driving and parking 199
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi- tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi- cle occupants.
System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in par- ticular: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of
their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi- cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.
Warnings may be interrupted when driving along- side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro- longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving
objects
Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor- recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa- ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).
200 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident despite
brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your- self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir-
ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis- play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro- priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dan- gers (/ page 198). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is
detected. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc- tion camera (/ page 168). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correct- ing brake application back into your lane.
Driving and parking 201
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis- played in the on-board computer: R Ã (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active and operating. R Ã (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active but not operating. R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva-
ted or there is a malfunction.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis- play 1 appears in the multifunction display. The system does not apply the brake if you acti- vate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assis- tance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continu- ous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at
any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and
driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle,
an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving par- allel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
202 Driving and parking
System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed.
If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane correcting brake application takes place (/ page 202). The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, if there are
highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc- tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog- ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov- ered. R If the distance from the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle
is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function.
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions.
The damping is tuned individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors: R The road surface conditions R Vehicle load R The drive program selected R The driving style The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
AIR BODY CONTROL AIR BODY CONTROL function
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com- fort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following com- ponents and functions: R Air suspension with variable spring rate R Automatic level control system R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption R Manually selectable high-level setting for
greater ground clearance R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
constant damping force adjustment) R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program Drive program A: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level.
Driving and parking 203
R When driving at speeds of approximately 78 mph (125 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered.
R When driving at speeds below approximately 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.
Drive program ;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you
are traveling at higher speeds.
Drive program C: R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you
are traveling at higher speeds.
Drive program B: R The suspension setting is even firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you
are traveling at higher speeds.
204 Driving and parking
Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program = (/ page 153).
Setting the vehicle level
& WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high
Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited
to the driving style and the road surface conditions.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi- cle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of
the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: when you unload lug- gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.
* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.
# Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than
37 mph (60 km/h).
Raising the vehicle
# Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is set to the high level.
Your selection is saved.
The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit- uations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving between 37 mph (60 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately three minutes. R After changing a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program.
Lowering the vehicle # Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive pro- gram.
Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack If the electrical connection has been correctly established to the trailer or bicycle rack: R Up to approximately 18.7 mph (30 km/h):
the high level can be selected regardless of the drive program.
Driving and parking 205
R From approx. 18.7 mph (30 km/h): the vehi- cle is adjusted to normal level, regardless of drive program.
Rear view camera Function of the rear view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown in the media dis- play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park- ing. The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis- played only apply to road level.
206 Driving and parking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
2 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area
3 Lane marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Bumper 5 Guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
Normal view 1 Driven surface depending on the current
steering angle (dynamic)
Wide-angle view Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view 1 Yellow warning display: obstacles at a dis-
tance between approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) 2 Orange warning display: obstacles at a dis- tance between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) 3 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 4 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
Driving and parking 207
5 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
6 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
The color of warning display 1/2 changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance
less than 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Yellow: obstacles at a distance between
approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Orange: obstacles at a distance between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) or less
% Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 4 are displayed in green.
Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
System malfunction If the rear view camera is not ready for opera- tion, the System Inoperative message appears in the media display.
System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi- cle sensors and cameras (/ page 168).
% Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
360° camera Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con- sists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system assists
208 Driving and parking
you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround- ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park- ing. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
Views of the surround view camera
1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras
in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam-
era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
trailer hitch) Function of the guide lines Guide lines are also displayed in the camera images of the top views, which aid you by show-
ing you the calculated vehicle path as well as the distance to objects and other vehicles, based on the current steering angle. 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately
1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 2 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
% When Active Parking Assist is active, paths 2 are displayed in green. The guide lines show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level.
In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown as well (/ page 211). The color of warning display changes dynami- cally and is based on the distance to the detec- ted obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance
less than 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Yellow: obstacles at a distance between
approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Orange: obstacles at a distance between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) or less
% When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- tional and no object is detected, the warning display is shown here in blue.
Wide-angle view, front 1 Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking 209 Top view with image from the front camera
1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 211)
2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will
take at the current steering angle Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
210 Driving and parking
1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out
2 Marker of the wheel contact points System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears in the media display. The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa- tions: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open.
R An outside mirror is not completely folded out.
R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog-
ged up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
% Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi- tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 280).
Calling up the view of the surround view camera using reverse gear # Shift to reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia
system (/ page 207). # If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of
the rear view camera is not shown: switch off the ignition, press and hold the c button, switch on the ignition and engage reverse gear again.
Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after
some time or after an ignition cycle.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver- ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. During the parking procedure or maneuvering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a dis- tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obsta- cles on all sides can be shown.
Driving and parking 211 Displays in the media display
Vehicles with surround view camera
Vehicles without surround view camera
212 Driving and parking
As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- tional, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Obstacles detected at the front left and on
the right-hand side
The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approximately 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.3 ft
(0.7 m) R Orange: approximately 2.3 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft
(0.4 m) R Red: < 1.2 ft (0.4 m)
Vehicles with surround view camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detec- ted. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also
sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system (/ page 215). Standard setting: R Front and sides: < 1.2 ft (0.4 m) R Rear: < 3.3 ft (1 m)
Warn Early All Around: R Front: < 3.3 ft (1 m) R Sides: < 2.3 ft (0.7 m) R Rear: < 3.3 ft (1 m)
A continuous warning tone sounds from a dis- tance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m), regardless of the selected setting.
Vehicles with surround view camera Vehicles without surround view camera
If an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected and the Camera & Parking menu is not open in the media display, pop-up window 1 appears: R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: at
speeds below 8 mph (12 km/h) R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: at
speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.3 ft (0.7 m) on the side 3 can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa- rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi- cle from the side. R Objects placed next to the vehicle.
Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol- lowing situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni-
tion. R You open the doors.
After an ignition cycle, obstacles must be detec- ted again by driving past them before a warning can be issued. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 168).
Driving and parking 213 Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
1 Vehicles with surround view camera 2 Vehicles without surround view camera If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.
214 Driving and parking
If the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors
and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 280). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi-
cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth- erwise be damaged.
# Vehicles without AIR BODY CONTROL: press the é button in the center console.
% Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (/ page 214).
If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indi- cator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi-
cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth- erwise be damaged.
Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window
appears.
# Tap = in the media display.
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the é symbol appears in the instru- ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.
Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta- cle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur- round view camera. When you are driving for- wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following func- tions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
Driving and parking 215
Vehicles with surround view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to
the road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (for exam- ple at the roadside) R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road
As soon as all requirements are met for search- ing for parking spaces, the Ç display appears in the multifunction display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the multi- function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. Vehicles with rear view camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked in reverse. Vehicles with surround view camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space,
216 Driving and parking
the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal- culated path of your vehicle. The parking procedure is assisted by accelerat- ing, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol- lowing situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the driver's door. R After activating Active Parking Assist, you
press the c button again (/ page 217).
System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks, or the bor- ders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculat- ing the parking procedure. In some circumstan- ces, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
This could cause a collision.
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more
than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly after a tire change or when spare
tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high.
R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a curb.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Parking with Active Parking Assist
# Press button 1.
Parking spaces detected by the system are shown in the media display. When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path 2 into cur- rently selected parking space 3 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-
cle. # If necessary, select another parking space. # Vehicles with surround view camera: if
necessary, change the parking direction. # To start the parking procedure: confirm
selected parking space 3.
Driving and parking 217
The turn signal indicator is switched on automat- ically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indi- cator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi- cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road
users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display:
218 Driving and parking
select the corresponding transmission posi- tion. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis- played in green in the camera image.
On completion of the parking procedure, the Ø Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro- cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa- ble, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be can- celed. You can also interrupt the parking pro- cedure by braking, for example, to let people in or out of the vehicle. The parking proce-
dure can then be continued by briefly press- ing the accelerator pedal.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist
Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view
camera. R The vehicle has been parked parallel to the
road with Active Parking Assist.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehi- cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle. # Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.
# Select Exit Space 2. # If, for example, the Please Engage Forward
Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi- tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space and is brought to a standstill by Active Park- ing Assist (at an angle to the direction of travel). The Ø Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears. # Take control of the vehicle and complete the parking process.
Driving and parking 219
% The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path. The turn signal indicator is switched on automati- cally when the exiting procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi- tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica- tor accordingly.
Maneuvering assistance Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display. % You can cancel an intervention by Drive
Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 214).
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva- sive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit- uations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are mixed
up.
R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R If you shift the transmission position to k or
h when the vehicle is stationary. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. R If the maneuvering assistance function is
activated in the multimedia system.
System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 211).
Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehi-
cles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any cross- ing traffic when backing up and maneuvering out
220 Driving and parking
of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. When the vehicle is backing up at a walking pace, Cross Traffic Alert is automatically active. % Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 198). System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent col- lisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view cam- era detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.
The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower
than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the media dis-
play . % You can activate and deactivate the maneu-
vering brake function (/ page 221). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selec- ted view in the Camera & Parking menu:
% If the maneuvering brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened in the media display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.
The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver-
ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function
The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation; do not rely on the maneu- vering brake function alone. # Be ready to brake.
System limits Observe the system limits of the following func- tions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 215) R Surround view camera (/ page 207)
The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines
Activating/deactivating the maneuvering assistant Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off. % For Drive Away Assist (/ page 219) to func-
tion, maneuvering assistant must be active.
instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 296).
Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys- tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per- mitted towing methods (/ page 295) and the
Driving and parking 221
222 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Notes on the Instrument Display and onboard computer
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an Instrument Display malfunction
If the Instrument Display has failed or mal- functioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes- sages and warnings from specific systems on the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument Display overview
Instrument Display and on-board computer 223
1 Speedometer The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
2 Index points 3 Outside temperature
4 Time 5 Area for additional values (example: tachom-
eter): tachometer/navigation/ECO display/ consumption/G-meter/date The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tach- ometer (overrevving range) is reached. 6 Coolant temperature display
During normal operation, the coolant tem- perature display is permitted to rise to 248°F (120°C). Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical sys- tem: POWER and CHARGE display (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor) 7 Selected drive program
224 Instrument Display and on-board computer 8 Selected transmission position 9 Multifunction display (example: standard dis-
play for a trip): assistance/telephone/navi- gation/trip/media/radio/styles and dis- plays/service/possible settings for Head-up Display A Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica- tor
Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel Depending on the equipment, the layout and the design of the control elements on the steering wheel may differ.
1 Control panel for cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 176)
2 G Back button, on-board computer 3 Touch Control, on-board computer
Swipe (navigate) Press a (confirm) 4 ò Main menu, on-board computer 5 ò Main menu, MBUX multimedia system
6 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system Swipe (navigate) Press (confirm)
7 G Back button, MBUX multimedia system 8 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem £ Voice Control System 9 To adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting
Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat- ing the on-board computer.
The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/ home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. % To operate Touch Control 3 in the most
effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone
R Navigation R Trip R Radio R Media R Service R Vehicles with an instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit: Designs
% You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.
# To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.
% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selec- tion or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 225
# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a func- tion, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con- trol.
# To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.
Selecting the Head-up Display # To switch on the Head-up Display: switch
on the Head-up Display via the multimedia system or activate it in the menu bar by swip- ing upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display menu will be selected on the Head-up Display. # To switch to the Head-up Display: press the left-hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To set the three display ranges of the Head-up Display: swipe upwards or down- wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
226 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Full-screen menus You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display: R Assistance R Trip R Navigation
# On the corresponding menu, use the lefthand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed fullscreen.
Overview of displays on the multifunction display Displays on the multifunction display u Active Parking Assist activated
(/ page 217) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 214) h Cruise control (/ page 175)
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 177)
ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 193) à Active Steering Assist (/ page 185) ¬ Active Traffic Jam Assist (/ page 184) Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 200) ± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 188) è ECO start/stop function (/ page 148) ë HOLD function (/ page 172) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 121)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 122)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 194). For an overview of the indicator and warning lamps, see (/ page 395).
Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
The Head-up Display projects the following infor- mation into the driver's field of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and
driving safety systems R Some warning messages
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content can be shown in the three areas of the Head-up Display (/ page 227).
Display content
1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise
control) System limits The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light conditions
Instrument Display and on-board computer 227
R Wet road R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses
% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the Head-up Display off and on again.
Setting the Head-up Display using the onboard computer
On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following Head-up Display settings or dis- plays can be selected or shown: R Position R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R Voice Control System
# To select the Settings menu: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. The Settings menu 5 will be selected.
# To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the position: swiping up or down on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
Setting messages, assistance status, tele- phone, audio and the Voice Control System # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The list of setting options will be displayed. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the left-hand Touch Control.
228 Instrument Display and on-board computer Selecting what the Head-up Display shows
(Example) 1 To switch the Head-up Display on/off 2 Left display area
Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Speedometer Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning
4 Right display area Traffic Sign Assist Assistant display
5 To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area
6 Index points 7 Lower display area (example: left display
area)
Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will
be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the tele- phone list on the Instrument Display is actively operated. # To select a display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD.
The Head-up Display is activated.
Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system 1 Touch Control and control panel for the
MBUX multimedia system 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Control panel for telephone, navigation,
radio/media, vehicle functions/system set- tings and favourites/themes 4 Touchpad
MBUX multimedia system 229
5 Controller Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches sound on or off
6 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or off
Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialog with the Voice
Control System. R Operating functions contact-free with the
MBUX Interior Assistant. % You can find further information about oper-
ation as well as about applications and serv- ices in the Digital Operator's Manual. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
230 MBUX multimedia system Home screen overview
1 Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen
2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system is not available) 5 Mercedes me connect active
6 Transmission of vehicle position active 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network,
network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time 8 Calls up the Notifications Center 9 Calls up an application using the symbol A Application and current information
B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address C Index points and selected display area D Calls up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and
FAVORITES
% If Mercedes me connect is active 5, the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the backend system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is coun- try-dependent. If transmission of vehicle position is active 6, Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection informa- tion. The function is country-dependent.
Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control
1 © Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control
=9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (confirm) 3 G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call ~ Rejects or ends a call 5 Increase volume: swipe upwards Reduce volume: swipe down
MBUX multimedia system 231
8 Switch off the sound: press 6 £ Starts the Voice Control System
ß Calls up favourites (press briefly) or adds favourites and themes (press and hold)
% For optimum operation of Touch Control 2, use the tip of your thumb if possible.
Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single-finger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Using the touchscreen # Select menu options, symbols or characters
by pressing briefly. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left
or right. # To use handwriting to enter characters:
write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
232 MBUX multimedia system
# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.
Using the touchpad
# To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To use handwriting recognition: write a
character on the touchpad. # To open or close the Notifications Cen-
ter: swipe down or up with two fingers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
Calling up applications using buttons
1 G Returns to the previous display 2 ~ Calls up the audio control menu 3 © Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad
1 % button calls up the telephone 2 z button calls up navigation 3 | button calls up radio or media 4 y button calls up vehicle functions
5 ß button Press briefly: calls up favourites Press and hold: adds a favourite or creates a new theme
# Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. # Call up the application (/ page 230).
Functions of the Voice Control System
With the Voice Control System, various applica- tions in the MBUX multimedia system are opera- ble using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Navigation R Telephone R Media player R Messages R Vehicle functions
Starting the Voice Control System
# Press 1. or # Say "Hello Mercedes".
Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
& WARNING Risk of injury from the cam- era's laser radiation
This product uses a classification 1 laser sys- tem. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and
repairs carried out by a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses).
MBUX multimedia system 233
System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel
may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off tempora- rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again. R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro- fiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. R Recognition can be impaired by reflective clothing, an adverse color of clothing or by accessories, for example.
234 MBUX multimedia system R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may
be limiting the detection area of the camera.
Keep the camera's field of vision clear. R The camera is not operational.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter.
The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:
Interaction area
Interaction
In front of the media display or Proximity to the control element above the touchpad
Above the center console
Defined pose
Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements
Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat
Description
The Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a con- trol element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required.
A favorite is called up with a defined pose.
With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mir- ror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off.
By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.
Switching the reading light and search light and on or off
Requirements: R For the reading light: the function is availa-
ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter-
action area below the inside rearview mirror. R For the search light: the function is availa-
ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter-
action area above the front passenger seat. R The seat belt on the front passenger seat
must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.
Switching the reading light on and off # Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the
inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or the front passenger.
MBUX multimedia system 235 Switching the search light on and off
# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver.
# To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.
Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favourites For electrically adjustable seats observe the fol- lowing notes.
236 MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi- tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of
driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move- ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or
# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop- ped.
The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre- venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without changing the stored profile settings of other drivers. % Information on profiles from Mercedes me
connect can be found in the Digital Opera- tor's Manual. Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate con- trol and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.
For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the freeway, you can save your prefer- red settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive pro- gram, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an appli- cation.
Configuring profiles, themes and sugges- tions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles
Creating a new profile # Select W Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect
Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile . # Select Finish.
Selecting profile options # Select Ä for a profile.
The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting themes or favorites
R Configuring suggestions
Configuring suggestions # Select Ä for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow
Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Suggestions on or off. # To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. Learning for 24 h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula- ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.
Creating new themes # Select ©. # Select THEMES. # Select W Create Theme.
The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.
MBUX multimedia system 237
# Select Continue r. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and
store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continue r. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continue r. # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry field and con-
firm with a. # Select Save.
System settings Overview of the system settings menu
In the system settings menu, you can make set- tings in the following menus and control ele- ments: R Display
- Styles - Instrument lighting - Display brightness
238 MBUX multimedia system
- Edge lighting - Day/night design R Control elements - Keyboard language and handwriting rec-
ognition - Sensitivity of the touchpad - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R Voice Control System R Sound - Entertainment - Navigation and traffic announcements - Telephone - Voice amplification to the rear compart-
ment R Connectivity
- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC R MBUX Remote Control
- Authorizing and deauthorizing devices R Time & date R Language
R Units for distance R Software updates R Data import/export R PIN protection R System Reset
Information on important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required
for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update
by restarting the system
% If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto- matically.
The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install
The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The system update can be downloaded man- ually at a later time.
Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com- pleted and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example.
% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation.
Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and
accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied.
If all requirements have been fulfilled, the down- loaded system update is installed. The multime- dia system cannot be operated while the down- loaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali- fied specialist workshop to resolve the problem.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul-
timedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi.
Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc- tions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufactur- er's operating instructions.
MBUX multimedia system 239
# Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot.
Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys- tem. # Confirm the entry with ¡.
Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.
The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. # Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.
240 MBUX multimedia system
Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions). # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. # Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network.
The connection is established again.
Configuring the multimedia system as a WiFi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec- tion established must be selected on the multi- media system and on the device to be connec- ted. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and confirm.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC.
# Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
# Select Continue.
Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.
Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehi-
cle's NFC interface. # Select Finished.
The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key.
A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab- lished, the new security key must be entered.
Navigation Notes on navigation Route guidance with augmented reality
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic- tion or wrong interpretation of the dis- play
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.
# Avoid extended observation of the cam- era image.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi- tional information
The additional information from the augmen- ted reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.
Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press the z button.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi- tion. The navigation menu is shown.
MBUX multimedia system 241
The navigation menu is hidden if route guid- ance is active. # To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.
242 MBUX multimedia system Navigation overview
Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional des-
tination entry options 2 To cancel active route guidance 3 To repeat a navigation announcement and
switch navigation announcements on or off
4 ON THE WAY menu with Route Overview, Alternative Routes and Report Traffic Incident (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic Announcements, Area Alerts and Live Traffic Subscription Info To display Route List
POSITION menu with Save Position and Compass 5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and Highway Information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced
Entering a destination Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to?
MBUX multimedia system 243
1 The federal state or province in which the vehicle is located
2 Entering a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry
5 a Confirms an entry 6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language
A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
244 MBUX multimedia system
# Enter the destination in 2. The entries can be made in any order. The following entries can be made, for exam- ple: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name
# Select a search result in list 3. # Calculate the route (/ page 244). % You can find further information about desti-
nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or prov-
ince 1. # Select the federal state or the province in
1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list 3.
# Select the federal state or the province from list 3.
Using online search Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina- tions or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address. # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service
from the countries list. or # If the on-board search delivers no results,
enter the destination in input line 2. # Select the destination in the list.
The detailed view for the route is displayed.
Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance
Requirements: R The destination has been entered.
R The destination address is shown. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped.
# Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.
or # Select ¦.
# Select Set as Waypoint. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.
or # Select Start New Route Guidance.
The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.
Selecting route settings # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration
with Dynamic Route Guidance r. # Select route options with Avoid Options. # Activate Suggest Alternative Route.
Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
# Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.
Activating route guidance with augmented reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera
symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning maneu- ver and will show additional information. # To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.
Displaying additional information in the cam- era image # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers.
During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.
MBUX multimedia system 245
Using map functions
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation
Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger
on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the
media display.
Moving the map # Move one finger in any direction on the
touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle
position: press \ briefly.
Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol
on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up.
Switching freeway information on/off # Select Z.
246 MBUX multimedia system
# Switch Highway Information on or off.
Using services
Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account
and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traf- fic Information # Select Z.
# Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Switch on Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing
Traffic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn- ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-XCommunication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic Incidents options. # Set the options.
If Traffic is switched off and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.
Displaying weather information and other map contents # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-
TENT category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.
Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.
Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper- ating integrated communication equip- ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip- ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com-
munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system 247
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can-
not be thrown around in such situa- tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart- ment.
248 MBUX multimedia system
Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 105) Bluetooth® connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® profiles: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
R MAP (Message Access Profile) - The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system.
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functional- ity can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions.
Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception
station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A require- ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Telephone menu overview
MBUX multimedia system 249
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 5 Options 6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search
Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel- ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth®.
250 MBUX multimedia system
R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). - You can use all the functions of the multi- media system with the mobile phone in the foreground. - You can receive incoming calls and mes- sages with the mobile phone in the back- ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Searching for a mobile phone # Select í. # Select Connect New Device.
Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pair- ing. # Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.
Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:
- R Accept a call - k End Call - i Create Confer. Call
- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.:
- Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Saving a contact as a favorite R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: - Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message
Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv- ices. You can use the following services via the multi- media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me
button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto- matic emergency call and SOS button)
The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break- down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 252). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 253). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 259). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Information on Mercedes me connect Acci- dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system (/ page 259) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for- wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- dent and Breakdown Management. Forward- ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehi- cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide after auto- matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 253)
MBUX multimedia system 251
In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur- ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti- mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub- ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
252 MBUX multimedia system
% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover- age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys- tem.
More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me con- nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con- nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con-
trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services
You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me con-
nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.
Mercedes me calls Making a call via the overhead control panel
1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button 1.
Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it
briefly. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least
one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over- head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 252). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general
information about the vehicle
You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle
R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 254).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system
Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover-
age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that
vehicle data can be transferred automati- cally.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes me connect.
After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.
MBUX multimedia system 253
Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection
Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or
breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec- ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.
254 MBUX multimedia system
# Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Break- down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 251). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your call and organizes the break- down and accident assistance.
You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident,
an automatic emergency call can be initi- ated. This has priority over all other active calls. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with
Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage- ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom- mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi- media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select
Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Center takes your preferred appoint- ment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint- ment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap- pears at a later time.
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup-
ported by the mobile phone network pro- vider. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi- cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission
technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv-
ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys-
tem.
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv- ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa- ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication
platform installed in the vehicle
If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data
If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys- tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv- ices are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for
MBUX multimedia system 255
Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwar- ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in
every country.
256 MBUX multimedia system
Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes
me apps updated.
You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes
me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes
me user account and the vehicle
R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the
web browser depending on availability
Web browser overview The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.
MBUX multimedia system 257
1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle
is in motion.
Overview of smartphone integration
With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer- tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul- timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime- dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional
mobile phone can be connected using Blue- tooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte- gration is only possible with an Internet connec- tion. The appropriate application must be down- loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suita- ble cable.
258 MBUX multimedia system
Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the
function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con- trol box) R Apple CarPlay® R Android Auto
You can start Smartphone Integration using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. You can end Smartphone Integration by discon- necting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.
Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system
R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911.
Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net- work coverage from the wireless service provid- ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your MercedesBenz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol- lows (/ page 260). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod- ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con- nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available.
The ignition must be switched on before an auto- matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory.
MBUX multimedia system 259
% eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans- ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 259) or manually (/ page 260) Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue.
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit- uation. Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS but- ton), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.
Triggering an automatic MercedesBenz emergency call Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
The MercedesBenz emergency call system trig- gers an emergency call automatically in the fol- lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such
as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the
MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. The MercedesBenz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto- matic emergency call.
260 MBUX multimedia system
If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer- gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu- lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call # To use the SOS button in the overhead
control panel: press and hold the SOS but- ton for at least one second (/ page 252). # To use voice control: use the Voice Control System voice commands .
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer- gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Depress the button for several sec- onds.
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call system
In the event of an automatic or manual emer- gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route
( (a few hundred meters )before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not
R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU- SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FORMERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter-
mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established.
MBUX multimedia system 261
262 MBUX multimedia system
Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu
Symbol
Designation
6
Play
8
Rest
:
Repeat a track
9 û/ü ß 5
ª
Random playback Skip forwards/back Options Categories
Search
Function Select to start or continue playback.
Select to pause the playback.
Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. Select to play back the tracks in random order.
Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
Select to show additional options.
Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
Symbol Z © j 2
Designation Settings Home Messaging Full screen
Function Select to make settings. Select to return to the home screen. Select to call up messaging. Select to switch to full screen mode.
MBUX multimedia system 263
The following functions and settings are availa- ble in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video files
Authorizing a Bluetooth® audio device for media playback Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment.
R The audio equipment supports the Blue- tooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª With Bluetooth® audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio files using the multimedia
system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.
Authorizing a new Bluetooth® audio device
# Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device.
Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connec- ted with the multimedia system.
264 MBUX multimedia system
Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth® audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the
list. The connection is being established.
Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu
Symbol ©
Designation Home
j
Messaging
û/ü
Skip forwards/back
Z
Settings
Function
Select to return to the home screen.
Select to call up messaging.
Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following addi- tional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent.
Symbol HD
8 f 4 ª
Designation HD radio®
Silent function Store radio stations Station list Search
Additional functions of TuneIn radio % A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.
MBUX multimedia system 265
Function Select to switch the HD Radio® function on or off. This function is not available in all countries. Select to switch off the sound. Select to save a station in the presets. Select to have the station list shown. Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
266 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol Z
ß 6/8 5
Designation Settings
Favorites Play/Pause Browse
Function
The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account Select during playback to save the station cur- rently set as a favorite. Select to start, stop or continue playback.
Select to choose a category and then a radio station.
Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter- tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel-
lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
Symbol Z
5
6 8
Designation Settings
Playback control
Play Rest
MBUX multimedia system 267
Function
The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels
with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport
alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam-
lessly Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode. Select to start or continue playback.
Select to pause the playback.
Depending on the frequency band selected, dif- ferent functions are available to you.
Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.
Calling up TuneIn Radio Requirements:
268 MBUX multimedia system
R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmis- sion free of interference.
% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
% The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio
# Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.
Setting up satellite radio
Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider
has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas-
ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Options # Select Service Information.
The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub- scription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service acti- vated online. To do so, please visit https://
www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z 5 Alerts Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of
matches in the Live program. Activating the music information function # Activate Music Alerts O. Setting a music alert # Select Add Alert.
# Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.
Activating sports information # Activate Activate Sports Alerts O.
Setting a sport alert # Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog
window.
Deleting individual sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries.
All highlighted alerts are deleted.
Deleting all sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries.
All alerts are deleted.
Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu
The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume:
- Automatic adjustment
MBUX multimedia system 269
Burmester® surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround
sound system only) R Sound profiles R Volume:
- Automatic adjustment
270 Maintenance and care
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long
periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv- icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying the service due date On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer
(/ page 224).
Information on regular maintenance work
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
# Adhere to the prescribed service inter- vals.
# Always have the prescribed mainte- nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor- mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi- cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi- bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci- fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops R mainly short-distance driving
R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
R when the engine is often left idling for long periods
R operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur- ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 270).
Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv- ing with the hood unlocked
The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood
is locked.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood
The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Open or close the hood only when there
is nobody in the hood's range of move- ment.
Maintenance and care 271
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com-
partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off.
272 Maintenance and care
# Never reach into the danger zone sur- rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition
system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind- shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
Opening the hood
# To release the hood, pull on handle 1.
# Push handle 1 of the hood catch upwards and lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm).
Closing the hood # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in
(20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.
# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil Checking the engine oil level using the onboard computer Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level You will see one of the following messages on the multifunction display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement
of the oil level is not yet possible.
Maintenance and care 273
# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.
R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.
R Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar dis- play for indicating the oil level on the multi- function display is orange and is below "min":
# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. R Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc- tion display is orange and is above "max": # Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. R For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On # Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level. R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
274 Maintenance and care
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood. Refilling engine oil
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart- ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening.
# Allow the engine to cool off and thor- oughly clean the engine oil from compo- nent parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi- tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi- cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
# Do not use additives.
* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter.
# Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop.
% Depending on driving style, the vehicle con- sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
# Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
# Add engine oil. # Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 273).
Checking the coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded.
# Let the motor cool down before opening the cap.
# When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
# Open the cap slowly to release pres- sure.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Maintenance and care 275
# Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot- tom quarter of the temperature display.
# Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure.
# Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
0.6 in (1.5 cm) over marker bar 2.
# If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.
% Further information on coolant (/ page 343)
276 Maintenance and care
Refilling the windshield washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
# Remove cap 1 by the tab. # Add washer fluid.
Keeping the air-water duct free # Keep the area between the hood and the
windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.
Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer- tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function
R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- uations: # During towing # In a car wash
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear- ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The surround view camera or the rear view
camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position
g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R For car washes with a conveyor system: neu- tral i is engaged.
% In car washes with a conveyor system: if you leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the SmartKey is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged.
Maintenance and care 277
% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Notes on using a power washer
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex- pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-
spray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts
replaced immediately.
278 Maintenance and care
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140°F (60°C). R Observe the information on the correct dis- tance in the implement manufacturer's oper- ating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sour- ces and ventilation slits.
Washing the vehicle by hand
* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 280).
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care
Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork.
Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off
afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro- leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate- rials. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Matte finish R Only use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
Maintenance and care 279
R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the
latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final
hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish-
ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on cleaning decorative foils Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint- work care" (/ page 278). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably.
R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora- tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom- mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils
are impaired by: - Sunlight - Temperature, e.g. hot air blower - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents
- Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.
Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif- ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
280 Maintenance and care
Notes on care of vehicle parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail- pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi- cle parts: Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to
remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out. Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom- mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement
position (/ page 126). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the
wiper blades with a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear
bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 168). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini- mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia
system (/ page 211). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the
camera lens.
R Do not use a power washer. Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended
for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Notes on care of the interior
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol- vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol- vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod-
ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol- lowing notes on cleaning and care:
Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F
(80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber
cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). R Do not use any other agents.
Maintenance and care 281
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate-
rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sun cream to come in contact with the plas- tic trim.
Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp
cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,
polishes or waxes.
Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec-
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
282 Maintenance and care
Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA
* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # Do not use solvent-based cleaning
agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol- ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.
R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen- ded for Mercedes-Benz.
R Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a microfiber cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural
surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences.
Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too
damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1%
soap solution and allow to dry.
Emergency Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in the stowage com- partments in the driver and front passenger door. # To remove: pull out safety vest bag by loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest.
5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. The safety vest must be replaced in the following situations: R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty R The maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded
Breakdown assistance 283
Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle
1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron
# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.
# Remove warning triangle 2.
284 Breakdown assistance Setting up the warning triangle
First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview
# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri- angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2.
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side.
First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is in the trunk in the left-hand or right-hand storage net, depending on the model.
Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac- teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip- ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos-
sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 285). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 286). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 252). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 328).
% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.
Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
When driving in emergency mode the han- dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum
speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP® intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls
# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special-
Breakdown assistance 285
ist workshop with regard to their further use. # The defective tire must be replaced in every case.
With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How- ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys- tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con- junction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con- junction with an activated tire pressure monitor- ing system.
286 Breakdown assistance
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tires for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition
Driving distance pos- sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden
50 miles (80 km)
Fully laden
19 miles (30 km)
The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand- ard tire as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk floor.
1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire inflation compressor Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the cargo compartment floor. Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres-
sor (/ page 286).
R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)
You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora- tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C).
& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant
The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the
tire (larger than damage previously men- tioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R After journeys with very low tire pressure or with flat tires
# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor-
oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor- oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contamina- ted with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla- tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali- fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tire.
Breakdown assistance 287
# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.
# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
288 Breakdown assistance # Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of
tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. # Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards
into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres- sor.
# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire.
# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. # Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle. # Switch on the ignition.
# Switch on the tire inflation compressor using On/Off switch 3. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum- ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compres- sor during this phase! # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera- ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- lene. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained
If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).
* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre- sponsible disposal
Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla- tion compressor.
# Pull away immediately.
Breakdown assistance 289
# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained
If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal- ant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar
290 Breakdown assistance
on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. # To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.
# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2.
# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.
# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot- tle.
# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work- shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat- tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys- tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking
R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
# In the event of a short circuit or a simi- lar incident, contact a qualified special- ist workshop immediately.
# Do not drive on. # Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 169) R Further information on ESP® (/ page 170)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes- ted and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec- trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat- tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases.
# Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
Breakdown assistance 291 If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro- sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.
292 Breakdown assistance Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat-
tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec- tion point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over- voltage
When charging using a battery charger with- out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec- tion point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over- voltage
When charging using a battery charger with- out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro- gen gas igniting
There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con- necting and disconnecting the battery. # When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat- tery terminals with identical polarity. # During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con- necting and disconnecting the jumper cable. # Do not connect or disconnect the bat- tery clamps while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo- sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila-
tion. # Do not lean over a battery.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro- zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera- tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg- ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis- tance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro- zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe- cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat- tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Breakdown assistance 293
Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg-
ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con- nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc-
tions before charging the battery.
294 Breakdown assistance
Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided
using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jump start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in position j. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are
switched off. R The hood is open.
Example: engine compartment
# Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc- tion of the arrow.
# Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. Always
begin with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first. # During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed. # Connect the negative pole of the donor bat- tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first. # During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle. # During the charging process: start the charging process. # During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes. # During starting assistance: before discon- necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec- trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps:
# First, remove the jumper cable/charging cable from ground point 3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.
# After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.
Further information can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(/ page 290). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Breakdown assistance 295
Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require- ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol- ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith- ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith- ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con- nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon- nected in the same way.
Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer- tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- uations: # During towing # In a car wash
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.
296 Breakdown assistance
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys- tems. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow-
ing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive
Both axles on Yes, max. 50 km at 50 km/h the ground
Front axle
No
raised
Rear axle raised
Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock
4MATIC vehicles
Both axles on Yes, max. 50 km at 50 km/h the ground
Front axle
No
raised
Rear axle
No
raised
To tow with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 295).
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started
R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i or j
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, or the multifunction dis- play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away (/ page 298). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta- tion.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis- tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow- ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded.
# A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permis- sible gross mass of your own vehicle, other- wise the following could occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even rollover. # If another vehicle is tow-started or
towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate (/ page 337).
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j.
# Install the towing eye (/ page 299). # Fasten the tow bar.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- tion of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 70).
# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 87). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist
(/ page 193). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position i. # Release the electric parking brake.
Breakdown assistance 297
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi- ted safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon- ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys-
tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif- icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle away.
298 Breakdown assistance
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport # Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 296). # Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in
order to load the vehicle. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position i. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 294).
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)
& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS
When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the
transporter. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels
with suitable tensioning straps.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissi- ble speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) when transporting.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur- ing it incorrectly
# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
# A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
Towing eye
Breakdown assistance 299 Installing the towing eye
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi- cle.
Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the trunk under the trunk floor.
# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.
300 Breakdown assistance
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi- cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc- ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) Vehicles with automatic transmission
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans- mission due to tow starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow started. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa- ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func- tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the labeling. The fuse ratings and fur- ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the trunk (/ page 302).
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor- rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special- ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side (/ page 301) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
(/ page 302) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 302) R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side
of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 302)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment
Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 300).
Opening
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind- shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
Breakdown assistance 301
# Turn clips 2 on cover 1 counter-clockwise a quarter-turn.
# Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.
302 Breakdown assistance
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3 from the top.
Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor-
rectly in lid 3.
# Insert lid 3 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.
# Fold down lid 3 of the fuse box and tighten screws 4.
# Insert cover 1 on both sides. # Turn clips 2 on cover 1 clockwise a quar-
ter-turn. # Close the hood.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter for further information.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 300).
# To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
# To close: reinsert cover 1.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 300).
# Fold up cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.
Breakdown assistance 303
304 Wheels and tires
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac- teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi- cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam- age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of injury through dam- aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.
Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm)
# For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg- ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving offroad: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 305).
R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm).
Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approx- imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Wheels and tires 305
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect mounting of snow chains
If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front
wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear
wheels in pairs.
Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 204).
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 171). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient or excessive tire pressure
Tires with either too low or too high a pres- sure present the following hazards: R the tires could burst R the tires could wear excessively and/or
unevenly R the driving characteristics as well as
steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired
# Observe the recommended tire pres- sures and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel:
R monthly R if altering the load on the vehicle R prior to long journeys R if the operating conditions change, for
example when driving off-road
306 Wheels and tires
# Adjust the tire pressure where neces- sary.
Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire faults as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear
R Increased fuel consumption
& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.
Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage
& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea- ted pressure drop in the tires
The wheels, valves or tires could be dam- aged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture
or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find specifications for the tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the fol- lowing labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 312). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (/ page 307).
Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 318).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: You can also see the tire pressure in the driver's display. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example
data.
Wheels and tires 307
If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num- bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.
308 Wheels and tires
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 319). R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 312) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 318)
Checking tire pressures manually
# Read the tire pressure for the current operat- ing conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.
# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.
# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recom- mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 305)
R Tire pressure table (/ page 307) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 312)
Tire pressure monitoring system Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem
& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor- rect tire pressure
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and then inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for these tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- ingly, if the low tire pressure telltale illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main- tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately a minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina- ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea- sons, including the installation of incompati- ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace- ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 310).
Wheels and tires 309
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways: R via display messages (/ page 388). R via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster (/ page 408)
The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val- ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 408).
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R The tire pressure has been set incorrectly R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
object penetrating the tire, for example
310 Wheels and tires
R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source
Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres- sure monitoring system
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of
the individual wheels:
R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes
R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni- tored.
# Compare the tire pressure with the recom- mended tire pressure for the current operat- ing condition (/ page 307). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 305).
% The values displayed in the on-board com- puter may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure value indi- cated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure.
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem
Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 305).
Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message is shown in the multi- function display. # To restart, press Touch Control on the lefthand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur- rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 305)
Tire pressure loss warning system Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrectly set tire pressure R Sudden pressure loss caused, for example,
by a foreign object penetrating the tire R Steady pressure loss in several tires
The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains
R When adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel- eration
R Driving with a high load
The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 305) R Display messages about the tires
(/ page 388)
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system
Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all wheels.
Wheels and tires 311
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Control System Active Restart message is shown in the multifunc- tion display. # To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display. # Select Yes. # To confirm restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display.
312 Wheels and tires
After you have driven for a few minutes, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure of all the tires. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 305)
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac- ard
& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa- ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris- tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the
permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding
the maximum load.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.
Wheels and tires 313
R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage.
R Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 337). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres- sure table (/ page 307).
Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load
(/ page 313) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 305).
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur- suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. # (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. # (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) # (5): Determine the combined weight of lug- gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula- ted in Step 4. # (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter- mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Even if you have calculated the total load care- fully, you should still make sure that the maxi- mum permissible gross weight and the maxi- mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi- cle identification plate.
314 Wheels and tires
# Have your loaded vehicle including driver, occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max-
imum load (/ page 314)
R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 312)
R Tire pressure table (/ page 307) R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 337)
Calculation example for determining the maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying
Step 1 Example 1
Combined maximum weight of occupants and 1500 lbs (680 kg) load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)
seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi- cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 312). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the occupants Weight of occupants
Total weight of all occupants
Example 1
5
Front: 2 Rear: 3 Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg)
Step 3
Example 1
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs
rating from the Tire and Loading Information
(340 kg)
placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
Wheels and tires 315 Example 2 1 Front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)
316 Wheels and tires Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (/ page 316)
2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number (/ page 317)
3 Maximum tire load (/ page 318) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 318)
5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 319) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 319) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Trans- portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per- formance factors:
1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
% The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2) times
Wheels and tires 317
as well on the government course as a tire gra- ded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction grade
& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade- quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin
# Avoid wheelspin.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform- ance. Temperature grade
& WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi- ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres-
sure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the
tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man- ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.
318 Wheels and tires
% The data shown in the image is example data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu- facturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 324).
R Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size.
R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.
R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).
Information on the maximum tire load
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi- ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci- fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv- er's side (/ page 312). Specifications for maximum tire pressure
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci- fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen- ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 307). Information on tire characteristics
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
% The data shown in the image is example data.
This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2.
Wheels and tires 319
1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index % The data shown in the illustration is example
data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
320 Wheels and tires
First letter(s) 1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu-
facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.
Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per- cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre- sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (/ page 312) R Maximum tire load (/ page 318) R Load index
Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.
% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Index
Speed rating
ZR...Y1 ZR...(..Y)1 ZR1
up to 186 mph (300 km/h) over 186 mph (300 km/h) over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h).
R If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the max- imum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
R If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S2 H M+S2 V M+S2
up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 130 mph (210 km/h) up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu- facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.
Load index 8: R No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein-
forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire
1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.
Wheels and tires 321
R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure
Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly- ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOTmarked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi- cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
322 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow- ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen- ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac- tory. The tire and information table contains the rec- ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max- imum permissible load and the maximum per- missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso- ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug- gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli- cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci- fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip- ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the loadbearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand- ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi- mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi- mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur- chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
Wheels and tires 323
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric- tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi- tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi- nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
324 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen- sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model
When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con- trol systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur- thermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com- ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle.
Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar- anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles.
# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes
Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
Wheels and tires 325
* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus- ing permanent damage to the tire. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use
i M+S- tires.
Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations
& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires
The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk
326 Wheels and tires
of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your
driving style accordingly. # Use i M+S tires at outside temper-
atures of less than 50 °F (10 °C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur-
pose.
Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in
certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).
It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: All installed wheels must be equip- ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use win- ter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
R For i M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread.
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the i M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km).
R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R When replacing with tires that do not fea- ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires.
For more information on wheels and tires, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 305) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 312) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 319) R Tire pressure table (/ page 307) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 333)
Notes on rotating wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ- ent wheel sizes
Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen- sions.
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the
tire
Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
Wheels and tires 327
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 328).
Notes on storing wheels When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi- cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Required tire-change tool kit may include, for example: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt
The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1.
328 Wheels and tires
The tool bag contains: R Jack R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements: R The required tire-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.
R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift into position j. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the
normal vehicle level (/ page 204). # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 328). # Raise the vehicle (/ page 329).
Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps
Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 328).
Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub
cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.
Aluminum hub cap
# To remove: position socket 2 from the tirechange tool kit on hub cap 1.
# Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1
counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in
reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm).
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 328). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been
removed (/ page 328).
Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte- nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti- cally under the jack support point.
Wheels and tires 329
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk
lid.
330 Wheels and tires
# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- pletely.
Position of jack support points
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropri- ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi- cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup- port points.
# Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
Wheels and tires 331
Removing a wheel Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 329).
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup- port point 1.
# Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
# Turn ratchet 3 until the tire is raised a maxi- mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 331).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.
# Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com- pletely.
# Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
332 Wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving.
# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 324).
For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc- tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 324).
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by MercedesBenz and for the wheel in question.
* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw- ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.
# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 332).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 331). # To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto
the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let- ters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clock- wise.
Wheels and tires 333
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 to the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor- que checked immediately.
# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.
# Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn- ing system (/ page 311). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 310). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions
The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly. # Do not switch off ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced
334 Wheels and tires
at the nearest qualified specialist work- shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.
Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency
spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
% Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn- ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure loss warning sys- tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the
system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the sys- tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 305) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 312) R Tire pressure table (/ page 307) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 324)
Notes on technical data
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle electronics Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit- ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle.
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic- ular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor-
rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior
antenna installed at a qualified special- ist workshop.
Technical data 335
# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per- mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.
336 Technical data
1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear fenders 4 Trunk lid On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installing for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.
Frequency band and maximum transmission output
Frequency band
Maximum transmis- sion output
Short wave 3 - 54 MHz
(100 W)
4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz
(30 W)
2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz
(50 W)
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz
(10 W)
70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz
(35 W)
Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)
(10 W)
The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for some wavebands. R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G
tor's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app.
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate
Technical data 337 Vehicle identification plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
Radio operating permits for vehicle compo- nents Manufacturer information about wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Radio operating permits" in the Digital Opera-
338 Technical data
Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. VIN below right-hand front seat
Additional plates
Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).
1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering
1 Plate with information about emissions test- ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California
2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label
at the lower edge of the windshield
Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm- ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con-
tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operat- ing fluids.
Technical data 339
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre- sponsible disposal
# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi- ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating flu- ids: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
340 Technical data
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with gaso- line engines Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 339).
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul- fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the instruction label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 158). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON.
* NOTE Premature engine wear through unleaded regular gasoline
Impairment of the longevity and performance of the engine. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre- mium grade gasoline. # Do not drive at the maximum design speed. # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm.
Further information on fuel is available at the fol- lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 339).
* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by MercedesBenz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi- cated on the tank.
Technical data 341
Tank content and reserve fuel
Capacity Model
Total capacity
All models
17.4 gal (66.0 liters)
Model
Of which reserve
All models
1.8 gal (7.0 liters)
Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 339).
342 Technical data
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi- tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica- tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Quality and capacity of engine oil
Gasoline engines All models
MB-Freigabe or MBApproval
229.51, 229.52, 229.61 229.71*
* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con- sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi- cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.
Model E450 E 450 4MATIC
Capacity 10.0 US qt (9.5 liters) 8.9 US qt (8.5 liters)
Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 339).
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys- tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 339).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart- ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
from component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- ant
# Only use coolant that has been pre- mixed with the required antifreeze pro- tection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol- lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids 310.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem- peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro- tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Technical data 343
# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper- ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35°F (-37°C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49°F (-45°C))
Coolant capacity
Model All models
Capacity 13.7 US qt (13 liters)
Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 339).
344 Technical data
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior light- ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa- ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter- Fit.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- terFit with other windshield washer flu- ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other- wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro- neously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round.
Refrigerant Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 339).
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger- ant
If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli- mate control system may be damaged. # USA/China: Use only R134a refriger-
ant. # Canada: Use only R1234yf refrigerant.
* NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com- pressor oil
# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger- ant compressor oil.
Work on the climate control system may be car- ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand- ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys- tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig-
erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.
Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig-
erant used 6 Refrigerant type
Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig-
erant used 6 Refrigerant type
Symbols 1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R The need to have service work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop only
Technical data 345
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil
Model All models
Model All models
Refrigerant 23.6 ± 0.4 oz (670 ± 10 g)
PAG oil 2.8 ± 0.4 oz (80 ± 10 g)
Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment
346 Technical data
Height when opened Model
E450
E 450 4MATIC
Vehicle dimensions E450 Vehicle length
Vehicle width including out- side mirrors Wheelbase
1 Height when opened 68.5 in
(1741 mm) 68.8 in
(1748 mm)
190.0 in (4835 mm)
80.9 in (2055 mm)
113.1 in (2873 mm)
E450 Vehicle height
Turning radius
Vehicle dimensions E 450 4MATIC Vehicle length
Vehicle width including out- side mirrors Wheelbase
56.3 in (1431 mm)
37.4 ft (11.4 m)
190.0 in (4835 mm)
80.9 in (2055 mm)
113.1 in (2873 mm)
E 450 4MATIC Vehicle height
Turning radius
Canada: 56.3 in (1431 mm) USA: 56.7 in (1439 mm)
38.1 ft (11.6 m)
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the speci- fied vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the
curb weight and reduce the payload.
Model All models
Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)
Technical data 347
348 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Introduction
Information about display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may dif- fer from the symbols on the multifunction dis- play. The multifunction display shows high-prior- ity display messages in red. Certain display mes- sages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes- sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message
With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the Õ symbol to show further infor-
mation on the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the G back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid- den. The multifunction display shows these dis- play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.
Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip-
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the back button G.
Occupant safety Display messages
6
SRS Malfunction Service Required
6
Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)
6
Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 349
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 36). & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
350 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a per- son of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the sys- tem detects may be too low.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci- dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
Display messages PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 351
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The PRESAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
352 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
SmartKey Display messages
Á
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Have SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Obtain a New Key
Á
* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 67).
Replace Key Battery
Á
Key Not Detected (white display message)
* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 142).
Display messages
Á
Key Not Detected (red dis- play message)
Á
Don't Forget Your Key Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 353
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 142). * A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 142).
354 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Lights
Display messages
:
Check Left Low Beam (example)
:
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The corresponding light source is faulty. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty.
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See Operator's Manual
:
* The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 355
Display messages
:
Active Headlamps Inoperative
:
Switch On Headlamps
:
Switch Off Lights
:
Intell. Light System Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position.
* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the func- tions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
356 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 121). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 122). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
d
Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting
Ù
Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 357
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart- Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance). * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
358 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Ù
Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual
C
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* At least one door is open. # Close all doors.
M
* The hood is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Close the hood.
Display messages
N
_
Front Left Seat Backrest Not Locked (example)
¥
Check Washer Fluid
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 359
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The trunk lid is open. & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. # Close the trunk lid. * The seat backrest of the corresponding front seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 276).
360 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine Display messages To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times.
+
Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual
ÿ
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 141).
* The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant (/ page 275). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * The coolant is too hot. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
Display messages
ÿ 8
Fuel Level Low
8
Gas Cap Loose
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 361
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * The fan motor is faulty.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
362 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Transmission Display messages Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine
Apply Brake to Shift to D or R Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the engine. # Change the transmission position.
* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k.
* You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k.
Display messages Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away
Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer
Reversing Not Possible Service Required Transmission Malfunction Stop
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.
* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed. # When transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans- mission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j.
364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling Auxiliary Battery Malfunction
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Brakes
Display messages
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 165).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec- tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 165). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 165). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 165).
To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Can- ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.
Display messages
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: # Switch the ignition off. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 165).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 165).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 165). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 166).
# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.
Display messages
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake
$
(USA only)
J
(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition.
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
#
Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
ë
Off
é
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 172).
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371
Display messages
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!
¯
- - - mph Cruise Control Inoperative
Cruise Control Off
ç
- - - mph
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 173). # If necessary, take a break.
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 176).
* Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 175).
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 180).
372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
ç
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 177).
Suspended
ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 180).
Off Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Active Distance Assist Inoperative Active Distance Assist Now Available
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 177). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 180).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373
Display messages Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Active Steering Assist Inoperative Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops Beginning Emergency Stop
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 185). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. # Check the tire pressure if necessary.
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. Active Steering Assist is available once more.
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 187). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Ø
Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 185). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 184). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.
* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. When the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on.
* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375
Display messages Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 198). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 198). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative
ç Ã Ä ¸
Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 200). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R Dirt on the sensors R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 280). # Restart the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377
Display messages
_ Ã Ä à á
Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the windshield in front of the camera
% Condensation detected on the windshield will be automatically removed with the aid of a built-in heater within approximately 12 minutes.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield if necessary.
378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
ä
Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph
É
Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
Display messages
¢
Lowering
É
Vehicle Rising
É
Vehicle Rising Please Wait
É
Drive More Slowly
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 204). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
* The vehicle level may be lowered for the following reasons: R You have selected a different drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.
* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).
380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving safety systems Display messages
! ÷
Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381
Display messages
! ÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care- fully.
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
÷
Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
* ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383
Display messages
T ! ÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes me connect Display messages Device Detected at Diagnostics Connection See Operator's Manual
G
Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The vehicle functions for malfunction detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 25). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery Display messages
#
12 V Battery See Operator's Manual
#
See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. * If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is not being charged.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
#
Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual
#
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running
Û
48 V Battery See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387
Display messages
Ý
Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery...
Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual Engine Can Now Be Started
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Engine Can Now Be Started display message will be shown on the multifunction display. # Start the engine. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.
If the Engine Can Now Be Started display message does not appear after a few minutes: # Try to start the engine again. # If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the engine. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec- tion point of the 12 V battery (/ page 294). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.
388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Tire pressure monitor Display messages Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable
Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on.
* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors
h
Wheel Sensor(s) Missing
* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensors of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
h
Check Tires
h
Please Correct Tire Pressure
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 305) and the tires. * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 310).
390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
h
Warning Tire Malfunction Tires Overheated
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire R The tires can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi-
ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.
Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 284). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires. * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst.
Display messages Decrease Speed
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
* At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Tire pressure loss warning system
Display messages Check Tire Pressure Soon
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 305) and the tires. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 311).
* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 311).
* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil Display messages
5
Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling
5
Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. # Check the engine oil level when next refueling. Add engine oil (/ page 274). Notes on engine oil (/ page 341). * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. # When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 274). Notes on engine oil (/ page 341).
394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
5
Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level
5
Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level is too high.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * The engine oil level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 274). # Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 341).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395
Display messages
5
Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine
5
Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The oil pressure is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they
light up or flash after the engine has been star- ted or during a journey.
396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Instrument Display
8
F
!
!
é
Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display may differ from the example shown.
Indicator and warning lamps:
6
Restraint system (/ page 397)
ü
Seat belt (/ page 397)
Ù
Power steering (/ page 398)
ÿ
Coolant temperature (/ page 399)
;
Check Engine (/ page 399)
#
Electrical malfunction (/ page 399)
J
$ J L ä ä
! ÷ å
Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca- tion indicator (/ page 399) USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 402) Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 402) Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 402) USA: Recuperative Brake System (/ page 402) Canada: brakes (yellow) (/ page 402) USA: brakes (red) (/ page 402) Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 402) Distance warning (/ page 405) AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 405) DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 405) ABS (/ page 406)
ESP® (/ page 406)
ESP® OFF (/ page 406)
h
Tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 408)
T
Parking lamps (/ page 116)
L
Low beam (/ page 116)
K
High beam (/ page 117)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 117)
R
Rear fog light (/ page 116)
Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp
6
Restraint system warning lamp
ü
Seat belt warning lamp flashes
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
ü
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp
Ù
Power steering warning lamp (red)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Engine Warning/indicator lamp
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (red)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (yel- low)
;
Engine diagnosis warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 275). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401
Warning/indicator lamp
#
Electrical malfunction warn- ing lamp
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak- ing. # Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes Warning/indicator lamp
F
Electric parking brake indi-
! cator lamp (red) (USA only)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Electric parking brake indi- cator lamp (red) (Canada
! only)
The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403
Warning/indicator lamp
é
Recuperative Brake System
J warning lamp (USA only)
Brakes warning lamp (yel- low) (Canada only)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow é warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the multifunction display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
$
Brake warning lamp (USA
J only)
Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp
æ
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
L
Warning lamp for distance warning function
ä
Suspension warning lamp (yellow)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The white Active Brake Assist warning lamp is lit.
The system is switched off or unavailable.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 189).
* The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL. A malfunction has occurred in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp
!
ABS warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
÷
ESP® warning lamp flashes
& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 170). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
Warning/indicator lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up
å
ESP® OFF warning lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 170).
Tire pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409
Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.
410 Index
1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC
Function................................................ 158 12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) 48 V on-board electrical system
Operating safety...................................... 23 360° Camera
Function................................................ 207 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera).................................................. 211 Selecting a view..................................... 210
A A/C function
Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul- timedia system)..................................... 134 Switching on/off (control panel)........... 134 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 169 Acceleration see Kickdown
Accident and Breakdown Manage- ment
Mercedes me connect........................... 251 Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating........................... 66 Active Blind Spot Assist
Brake application................................... 199 Function................................................ 198 System limitations................................. 198 Active Brake Assist Function/notes..................................... 189 Setting................................................... 193 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 187 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 188 Calling up a speed................................. 180 Function................................................ 177 Increasing/decreasing speed................ 180 Requirements........................................ 180 Route-based speed adaptation.............. 183 Steering wheel buttons.......................... 180 Storing a speed..................................... 180 Switching off/deactivating.................... 180 Switching on/activating........................ 180
System limitations................................. 177
Active Emergency Stop Assist................. 187
Active Lane Change Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 189 Function................................................ 188
Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 202 Activating/deactivating the warning..... 202 Function................................................ 200 Setting the sensitivity............................ 202 System limits......................................... 200
Active light function.................................. 119
Active Parking Assist Exiting a parking space.......................... 218 Function................................................. 215 Maneuvering brake function.................. 220 Parking.................................................. 217 System limitations................................. 215
Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist Display.................................................. 182 Function................................................ 182
Index 411
Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 187 Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 187 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 188 Function................................................ 185 System limits......................................... 185
Active Traffic Jam Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 185 Function................................................ 184
Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function................................................. 121 Switching on/off................................... 122
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating......................... 123 Function................................................ 122
Additives Engine oil............................................... 341 Fuel........................................................ 341
Additives (engine oil) see Additives
Additives (fuel) see Fuel
ADS PLUS damping system see AIR BODY CONTROL
Adverse weather light............................... 120
After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS
Air bag Reduced protection................................. 44
AIR BODY CONTROL Setting................................................... 204 Suspension........................................... 203
Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. 134
Air distribution Setting................................................... 133 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 135
Air freshener system see Perfume atomizer
Air inlet see Air-water duct
Air pressure see Tire pressure
Air suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL
Air vents Adjusting (front)..................................... 137 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 138 Adjusting the AIRSCARF vents............... 138
Air vents see Air vents
Air-conditioning system see Climate control
Air-recirculation mode.............................. 136
Air-water duct Keeping free.......................................... 276
Airbag Activation................................................ 36 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 42 Installation locations............................... 42 Knee airbag............................................. 42 Overview................................................. 42 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 47 Protection................................................ 43 Side airbag.............................................. 42 Window curtain airbag............................. 42
Airflow Setting................................................... 133
412 Index
AIRSCARF Activating/deactivating........................... 99 Adjusting the outlets............................. 138
Alarm see Panic alarm
Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
All-wheel drive see 4MATIC
Ambient lighting Setting (multimedia system).................. 125
Android Auto see Smartphone integration
Animals Pets in the vehicle................................... 63
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains see Snow chains
Anti-theft protection Immobilizer.............................................. 85
Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration
Assistance systems see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods............... 271 Displaying the service due date............. 270 Function/notes..................................... 270 Regular maintenance work.................... 270 Special service requirements................ 270
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor......................................... 88 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm... 87 Deactivating the alarm............................ 86 Function.................................................. 86 Function of the interior motion sensor.... 87 The tow-away alarm function................... 87
ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 173 Setting................................................... 175 System limitations................................. 173
Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights............................ 117
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 148
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 148
Automatic front passenger front air- bag shutoff
Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff................ 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 47
Index 413
Automatic front passenger front air- bag shutoff
see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating......................... 132 Automatic seat adjustment Setting..................................................... 95 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 154 Drive program display............................ 153 Drive programs...................................... 152 DYNAMIC SELECT switch...................... 152 Engaging drive position......................... 156 Engaging neutral.................................... 155 Engaging park position.......................... 155 Engaging reverse gear........................... 155 Kickdown............................................... 157 Manual gearshifting............................... 156 Steering wheel paddle shifters.............. 156 Transmission position display................ 154 Transmission positions.......................... 154
B
Bag hook..................................................... 110
BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... 169 Battery
SmartKey................................................. 67 Battery
see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle)
Charging................................................ 294 Charging (Remote Online)...................... 143 Notes.................................................... 290 Notes (starting assistance and charging)............................................... 292 Replacing.............................................. 295 Starting assistance................................ 294 Belt see Seat belt Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 200 Function................................................ 198 System limitations................................. 198 Blower see Climate control
Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid Notes.................................................... 342
Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 171
Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 169 Active Brake Assist................................ 189 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 169 Driving tips............................................ 145 EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 171 HOLD function....................................... 172 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 145 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs...................................................... 143 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 143
Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown Changing a wheel.................................. 328
414 Index
Overview of the help functions................ 16 Roadside Assistance............................... 22 Tow-starting.......................................... 300 Towing away.......................................... 296 Transporting the vehicle........................ 298 Breakdown see Flat tire Buttons Steering wheel....................................... 224
C Calls
Mercedes me........................................ 252 Camera
see 360° Camera see Rear view camera Car key see SmartKey Car wash see Care Car wash (care).......................................... 276 Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings................... 246
Care Air-water duct........................................ 276 Automatic car wash............................... 276 Carpet................................................... 281 Decorative foil....................................... 279 Display................................................... 281 Exterior lighting..................................... 280 Headliner............................................... 281 Matte finish........................................... 278 Paintwork.............................................. 278 Plastic trim............................................ 281 Power washer........................................ 277 Real wood/trim elements...................... 281 Rear view camera.................................. 280 Seat belt................................................ 281 Seat cover............................................. 281 Sensors................................................. 280 Steering wheel....................................... 281 Surround view camera.......................... 280 Tailpipes................................................ 280 Washing by hand................................... 278 Wheels/rims......................................... 280 Windows................................................ 280 Wiper blades......................................... 280
Cargo tie-down rings................................. 109
Carpet (Care).............................................. 281
Change of address...................................... 22
Change of ownership.................................. 22 Changing a wheel
Preparation........................................... 328 Raising the vehicle................................ 329 Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel Changing gears Manually................................................ 156 Changing hub caps................................... 328 Charging Battery (vehicle).................................... 294 Mobile phone (wireless)......................... 113 USB port................................................ 113 Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL) Setting................................................... 204 Child safety lock Rear side windows................................... 62 Child seat Attaching (notes)..................................... 54 Basic instructions.................................... 51
Front-passenger seat (notes)................... 60 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing).............. 56 Notes on risks and dangers..................... 52 Securing on the front passenger seat...... 61 Securing on the rear seat........................ 59 Top Tether............................................... 58 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............... 52 Basic instructions.................................... 51 Special seat belt retractor....................... 55 Chock Storage location.................................... 327 Chock see Chock
City lighting............................................... 120
Cleaning see Care
Climate control Activating/deactivating......................... 134 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)......................... 134 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system)..... 134
Index 415
Activating/deactivating the synchro- nization function (control panel)............ 135 Activating/deactivating the synchro- nization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 135 Air-recirculation mode........................... 136 Automatic control.................................. 134 Calling up the air conditioning menu..... 134 Climate style function............................ 135 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control...................................... 133 Control panel for dual-zone auto- matic climate control............................. 133 Defrosting the windshield...................... 133 Filling capacity for PAG oil..................... 345 Front air vents....................................... 137 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra- grance system)...................................... 136 Ionization............................................... 136 Note...................................................... 133 Rear air vents........................................ 138 Refrigerant............................................ 344 Refrigerant filling capacity..................... 345 Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 135 Residual heat......................................... 136
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 134 Setting the air distribution..................... 133 Setting the airflow................................. 133 Setting the climate style........................ 135 Setting the fragrance system................. 136 Setting the vehicle interior tempera- ture........................................................ 133 Switching the rear window heater on/off................................................... 133 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 79 Climate style Function................................................ 135 Setting................................................... 135 Cockpit Overview................................................... 6 Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 166
Combination switch................................... 117 Computer
see On-board computer Connecting the parcel net......................... 110
416 Index
Consumption indicator Calling up.............................................. 154
Convenience closing feature...................... 80
Convenience opening.................................. 79 Coolant (engine)
Capacity................................................ 343 Check level............................................ 275 Notes.................................................... 343 Cooling see Climate control Copyrights License.................................................... 34 Trademarks............................................. 34 Cornering light........................................... 119
Cross Traffic Alert...................................... 219 Crosswind Assist
Function/notes...................................... 171 Cruise control
Activating............................................... 176 Buttons.................................................. 176 Calling up a speed................................. 176 Deactivating........................................... 176 Function................................................ 175
Requirements........................................ 176 Selecting................................................ 176 Setting a speed...................................... 176 Storing a speed...................................... 176 System limitations................................. 175 Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........... 28 Customer Relations Department............... 28
D Dashboard
see Cockpit Data acquisition
Vehicle.................................................... 29 Data protection rights
Data storage............................................ 32 Data storage
Data protection rights............................. 32 Electronic control units........................... 29 Online services........................................ 32 Vehicle.................................................... 29 Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights Switching on/off................................... 124
Deactivating the alarm (ATA)...................... 86 Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity
Wireless vehicle components.................. 25 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 279
Definitions (tires and loading).................. 321 Destination entry
Entering a POI or address...................... 243 Detecting inattentiveness
see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection.............................. 25
Digital Operator's Manual........................... 18 Dinghy towing
see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever
Engaging drive position......................... 156 Engaging neutral.................................... 155 Engaging park position.......................... 155 Engaging park position automatically.... 155
Engaging reverse gear........................... 155 Function................................................ 154
Display (care)............................................. 281
Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen......................................... 230
Display (multimedia system) Operating.............................................. 231
Display (on-board computer) Displays on the multifunction display.... 226
Display message Calling up (on-board computer)............. 348 Notes.................................................... 348
Display messages ¯ - - - mph........................................ 371 ç - - - mph........................................ 371
# 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 385 Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 386 : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... 355 é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... 370
é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... 371 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................ 354 $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... 369 # Check Brake Pads See Opera- tor's Manual.......................................... 370 + Check Coolant Level See Oper- ator's Manual........................................ 360 5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refu- eling...................................................... 393 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... 393 : Check Left Low Beam (exam- ple)........................................................ 354 h Check Tires.................................. 389 ¥ Check Washer Fluid..................... 359 ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off..................................... 360
Index 417
_ Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted..................................... 377 ç Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty......................................... 376 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ 380 ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ 382 Á Don't Forget Your Key.................. 353 É Drive More Slowly........................ 379 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 395 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine Off................................ 394 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine.................................. 395 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level.......... 394 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)............................... 349
418 Index
_ Front Left Seat Backrest Not Locked (example).................................. 359 8 Fuel Level Low.............................. 361 8 Gas Cap Loose............................. 361 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 381 ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 382 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 383 G Inoperative................................... 384 : Intell. Light System Inoperative.... 355 Á Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 353 Á Key Not Detected (white dis- play message)....................................... 352 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal- function Service Required (example)..... 349 ¢ Lowering...................................... 379
ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... 378 : Malfunction See Operator's Manual.................................................. 354 Á Obtain a New Key......................... 352 ç Off................................................ 372
ë Off................................................ 370 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. 365 h Please Correct Tire Pressure........ 389 F Please Release Parking Brake...... 368 Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat- tery........................................................ 387 Á Replace Key Battery..................... 352
# See Operator's Manual................ 385 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required................................................ 349 Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.. 357
Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual..... 358 # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run- ning....................................................... 386 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 386 É Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low....... 378 ç Suspended................................... 372 : Switch Off Lights.......................... 355 : Switch On Headlamps.................. 355
F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake.................................. 369 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting............... 357 É Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ 379 É Vehicle Rising............................... 379 h Warning Tire Malfunction............. 390 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. 388 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 375
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative...... 375 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur- rently Limited See Operator's Manual... 383 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi- ted See Operator's Manual.................... 384 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 372 Active Distance Assist Inoperative......... 372 Active Distance Assist Now Available.... 372 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 376 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera- tive........................................................ 376 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 373 Active Steering Assist Inoperative......... 373 Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer- gency Stops........................................... 373
Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 374 Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... 374 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 356 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.. 356 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 356 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop- erative................................................... 356 Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'................. 362 Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'..................... 362 Apply Brake to Shift to D or R................ 362 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction................ 364 Beginning Emergency Stop.................... 373 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual.................... 375 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative................. 375
Index 419
Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual.................................................. 387 Check Tire Pressure Soon..................... 391 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator.................................. 392 Cruise Control Inoperative..................... 371 Cruise Control Off.................................. 371 Decrease Speed.................................... 391 Device Detected at Diagnostics Con- nection See Operator's Manual............. 384 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away.... 363 Engine Can Now Be Started.................. 387 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................ 350 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................ 350 Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc- tioning................................................... 356
420 Index
N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away..................................................... 363 Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta- tionary................................................... 362 Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual....... 380 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... 353 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera- tor's Manual.......................................... 351 Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ 363 Run Flat Indicator Inoperative............... 392 Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer............................................ 363 Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling.................... 364 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable............................................ 388 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............. 388
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors...................................... 388 Tires Overheated................................... 390 To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine.................................... 362 To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec- onds or press 3 times........................... 360 Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail- able See Operator's Manual.................. 374 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative............... 374 Transmission Malfunction Stop............. 363
Display on the windshield see Head-up Display
Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door Locking (emergency key)......................... 71 Opening (from inside).............................. 69
Power closing function............................ 71 Unlocking (emergency key)...................... 71 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 69 Door control panel....................................... 14
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 317 Drawbar
see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving.................................. 145
Drive Away Assist...................................... 219 Drive Away Assist
see Protection against collision Drive position
Inserting................................................ 156 Drive program display............................... 153 Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver's seat
see Seat Driving safety system
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 169 Active Brake Assist................................ 189 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 169
Index 421
Cameras................................................ 168 EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 171 ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... 171 Overview............................................... 168 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 168 Responsibility........................................ 167 STEER CONTROL................................... 172 Driving system DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 202 Driving system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system
see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Drinking and driving.............................. 145 General driving tips............................... 145 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 143 Optimized acceleration.......................... 144 Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Suspension........................................... 202 Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT Configuring drive program I................... 153 Displaying engine data.......................... 153 Displaying vehicle data.......................... 153 Drive program display............................ 153 Drive programs...................................... 152 Function................................................ 152 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch).... 153 Selecting the drive program.................. 153
E
E10............................................................. 340
Easy entry feature Function/notes..................................... 102 Setting................................................... 103
Easy exit feature Function/notes..................................... 102 Setting................................................... 103
EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)
Function/notes...................................... 171 ECO Assist
Displaying.............................................. 152 Function/notes..................................... 150 ECO display Function................................................ 149 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start.......................... 148 Automatic engine stop........................... 148 Method of operation.............................. 148 Switching off/on................................... 149 Electric parking brake Applying automatically.......................... 164
422 Index
Applying or releasing manually.............. 165 Emergency braking................................ 166 Releasing automatically......................... 165 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided)......................... 284 Overview of the help functions................ 16 Reflective safety vest............................ 283 Removing the warning triangle.............. 283 Setting up the warning triangle............. 284
Emergency braking................................... 166
Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency engine start........................... 300
Emergency key Locking a door......................................... 71 Unlocking a door..................................... 71
Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle............................... 142
Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside).............................. 77
Emergency spare wheel Notes.................................................... 333
Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation................................................ 36
Engine ECO start/stop function........................ 148 Engine number...................................... 337 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 142 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 143 Starting (start/stop button)................... 141 Starting assistance................................ 294 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 160
Engine data Displaying.............................................. 153
Engine number.......................................... 337
Engine oil Additives................................................ 341 Capacity................................................ 342 Checking the oil level using the onboard computer..................................... 273 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 342 Quality................................................... 342 Topping up............................................. 274
EQ boost Operating safety...................................... 23 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 27
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP® Crosswind Assist................................... 171
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating......................... 171 Function/notes..................................... 170
Exterior lighting see Lights
Exterior lighting (care).............................. 280 Exterior mirrors
Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 130 Automatic mirror folding function.......... 132 Folding in/out....................................... 129 Operating the memory function............ 104 Parking position..................................... 131 Setting................................................... 129
Index 423
F
Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST
First-aid kit (soft sided)............................ 284 Flacon
Inserting/removing............................... 136 Flat tire
Changing a wheel.................................. 328 MOExtended tires.................................. 285 Notes.................................................... 284 TIREFIT kit............................................. 286 Flat towing see Tow-bar system Floor mats.................................................. 115
Fog light (extended range)........................ 120 Foil covering
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 168 Fragrance
see Perfume atomizer Free software.............................................. 34 Frequencies
Two-way radio....................................... 336
Front airbag (driver, front passenger)....... 42
Front passenger seat see Seat
Fuel Additives................................................ 341 E10........................................................ 340 Fuel reserve........................................... 341 Gasoline................................................ 340 Quality (gasoline).................................. 340 Refueling............................................... 158 Sulfur content....................................... 340 Tank content.......................................... 341
Function seat see Door control panel
Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 300 Dashboard fuse box.............................. 302 Fuse assignment diagram..................... 300 Fuse box in the engine compartment.... 301 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot- well....................................................... 302 Fuse box in the trunk............................ 302 Notes.................................................... 300
Fuses see Fuses
G Garage door opener
Clearing the memory............................. 164 Opening or closing the door.................. 164 Programming buttons............................ 162 Resolving problems............................... 163 Synchronizing the rolling code............... 163 Gasoline..................................................... 340 Gearshift recommendation...................... 157 Genuine parts.............................................. 20 Genuine wood (Care)................................. 281 Glide mode................................................. 157
H Handbrake
see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual)......... 304 HANDS-FREE ACCESS.................................. 75 Hazard warning lights............................... 118
424 Index
Hazardous substances Information.............................................. 23
Head level heating (AIRSCARF).................. 99 Head restraint
Front (adjusting mechanically)................ 93 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting)............................................... 95 Head-up Display Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 227 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer).............................................. 227 Function................................................ 226 Menu (on-board computer).................... 227 Operating the memory function............ 104 Setting the position (on-board com- puter).................................................... 227 Switching on/off................................... 228 Headlamps see Automatic driving lights Headliner (care)......................................... 281 Heating see Climate control
Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
High beam Activating/deactivating......................... 117
High-beam flasher..................................... 117 High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 121 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 122 Highway mode........................................... 120 Hill start assist.......................................... 173 HOLD function Function/notes...................................... 172 Switching on/off................................... 172 Home screen (media display) Overview............................................... 230 Hood Opening/closing.................................... 271
I Identification plate
Engine................................................... 337 Refrigerant............................................ 344 Vehicle.................................................. 337
Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 140
Ignition key see SmartKey
Immobilizer.................................................. 85
Indicator lamps see Warning/indicator lamps
Individual drive program Configuring............................................ 153 Selecting............................................... 153
Inside rearview mirror see Exterior mirrors
Inspection see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster Function/notes............................. 222, 223
Instrument Display Function/notes..................................... 223 Instrument cluster................................... 10 Warning/indicator lamps...................... 395
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Function/notes..................................... 222
Index 425
Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating......................... 120 Active light function............................... 119 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 121 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 122 Adverse weather light............................ 120 City lighting........................................... 120 Cornering light....................................... 119 Fog light (extended range)..................... 120 Highway mode....................................... 120 Overview................................................ 119
Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 124 Ambient lighting.................................... 125 Reading lamp......................................... 124 Switch-off delay time............................. 125
Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating........................... 88 Function.................................................. 87
Internet radio see TuneIn
Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul- timedia system)..................................... 136
iPhone® see Smartphone integration
J Jack
Storage location.................................... 327 Jump-start connection
General notes........................................ 292
K KEYLESS-GO
Locking the vehicle.................................. 69 Problem................................................... 70 Unlocking setting.................................... 66 Unlocking the vehicle.............................. 69 Kickdown Using..................................................... 157 Knee airbag.................................................. 42
L Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling
Lamp see Interior lighting
Lamps (Instrument Display) see Warning/indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- ing system
Installing.................................................. 56 Level control system
see AIR BODY CONTROL Light switch
Overview................................................ 116 Lighting
see Interior lighting see Lights Lights Active light function............................... 119 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 121 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 122 Adverse weather light............................ 120
426 Index
Automatic driving lights......................... 117 City lighting........................................... 120 Combination switch............................... 117 Cornering light....................................... 119 Fog light (extended range)..................... 120 Hazard warning lights............................ 118 High beam............................................. 117 High-beam flasher.................................. 117 Highway mode....................................... 120 Intelligent Light System......................... 119 Light switch........................................... 116 Low-beam headlamps............................ 116 Parking lights......................................... 116 Rear fog lamp......................................... 116 Responsibility for lighting systems......... 116 Setting the exterior lighting switchoff delay time......................................... 124 Setting the low beam............................. 124 Standing lights....................................... 116 Switching the surround lighting on/ off.......................................................... 124 Turn signal light...................................... 117 Limited Warranty Vehicle.................................................... 29
Live Traffic Information Switching the traffic information dis- play on................................................... 246
Load index (tires)....................................... 319
Load-bearing capacity (tires).................... 319 Loading
Bag hook................................................ 110 Cargo tie-down rings............................. 109 Definitions............................................. 321 Notes..................................................... 105 Roof luggage rack................................... 111 Loading guidelines.................................... 105
Loading information table........................ 312 Loads
Securing................................................ 105 Locking/unlocking
Activating/deactivating the auto- matic locking feature............................... 70 Emergency key........................................ 71 KEYLESS-GO........................................... 69 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................ 69
Low-beam headlamps Setting................................................... 124 Switching on/off.................................... 116
Lubricant additives see Additives
Luggage Parcel net............................................... 110 Securing................................................ 105
Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way)............................. 93
M MAGIC VISION CONTROL
Windshield wipers................................. 128 Maintenance
Vehicle.................................................... 22 Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction
Restraint system..................................... 36 Malfunction message
see Display message
Index 427
Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating......................... 221 Cross Traffic Alert.................................. 219 Drive Away Assist.................................. 219
Maneuvering brake function.................... 220 Maneuvering brake function
see Protection against collision Map
Displaying online map contents............. 246 Displaying weather information............. 246 Moving................................................... 245 Selecting the map orientation............... 245 Setting the map scale............................ 245 Switching freeway information on/off... 245 Massage program Overview................................................. 96 Resetting the settings.............................. 97 Massage programs Selecting the front seats......................... 97 Massage settings Resetting................................................. 97 Matte finish (cleaning instructions)........ 278
Maximum load rating................................ 318
Maximum permissible load Calculation example.............................. 314 Determining........................................... 313
Maximum tire pressure............................. 318
MBUX Interior Assistant Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free........................................... 235 Switching the search light for the driver on/off......................................... 235
MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) Overview............................................... 233
MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 167 Configuring drive program I................... 153 Notes.................................................... 229 Overview............................................... 229 Setting route-based speed adaptation... 184 Standby mode function.......................... 167
Mechanical key Inserting/removing................................. 67
Media Overview of the functions and sym- bols....................................................... 262
Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip- ment...................................................... 263
Medical aids................................................. 27
Memory function Function................................................ 103 Head-up Display -- Calling up stored settings................................................. 104 Head-up Display -- Storing settings....... 104 Operating.............................................. 104 Outside mirrors -- Calling up stored settings................................................. 104 Outside mirrors -- Storing settings........ 104 Seat -- Calling up stored settings.......... 104 Seat -- Storing settings.......................... 104 Steering wheel -- Calling up saved settings................................................. 104 Steering wheel -- Saving settings........... 104
Menu (on-board computer) Head-up Display.................................... 227 Overview............................................... 224
Mercedes me app Information............................................ 256
428 Index
Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment.......... 254 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center................................................... 253 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 253 Information............................................ 253 Making a call via the overhead con- trol panel............................................... 252 Transferred data.................................... 254
Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage- ment...................................................... 251 Information............................................ 250 Transferred data.................................... 252
Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 140
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call..................... 259 Information............................................ 258 Information on data transfer................. 260 Manual emergency call......................... 260 Overview............................................... 259
Mercedes-Benz Link see Smartphone integration
Message (multifunction display) see Display message
Message memory...................................... 348
Mirrors see Exterior mirrors
Mobile phone Wireless charging................................... 114
Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Model series see Vehicle identification plate
MOExtended tires..................................... 285
MULTIBEAM LED........................................ 119
Multifunction display Overview of the displays....................... 226
Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons.............................. 224
Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel
Multimedia system Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... 166
Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi- media system) see MBUX multimedia system see Touchpad
N Navigation
Notes..................................................... 241 Overview............................................... 242 Showing/hiding the menu..................... 241 Switching on.......................................... 241 Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route Neutral Inserting................................................ 155 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle......... 143
Index 429
O
Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Pets in the vehicle see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt
Oil see Engine oil
On-board computer Displaying the service due date............. 270 Head-up Display menu.......................... 227 Multifunction display............................. 226 Operating.............................................. 224 Overview of menus................................ 224
On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection
Online services Data storage............................................ 32
Open-source software................................ 34
Opening the trunk lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 75
Operating fluids Additives (fuel)....................................... 341 Brake fluid............................................. 342 Coolant (engine).................................... 343 Engine oil............................................... 341 Fuel (gasoline)....................................... 340 Notes.................................................... 339 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 344 Windshield washer fluid........................ 343
Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system.............. 23 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................... 25 EQ boost................................................. 23 Information.............................................. 23
Operating system see On-board computer
Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 21
Operator's Manual (digital)........................ 18
Optimized acceleration Activating.............................................. 144
Overhead control panel Overview.................................................. 12
P Paint code.................................................. 337 Paintwork (cleaning instructions)............ 278 Panel heating
Setting..................................................... 99 Panic alarm
Activating/deactivating........................... 66 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
see Sliding sunroof Park position
Inserting................................................ 155 Selecting automatically......................... 155 Parking see Electric parking brake Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
430 Index
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating............................................... 214 Adjusting warning tones........................ 215 Function................................................. 211 Switching off.......................................... 214 System limitations................................. 211
Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake see Electric parking brake
Parking for an extended period................ 166
Parking lights............................................. 116
Parking position Exterior mirrors...................................... 131 Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear.......................................... 132
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff
Payload Calculation example.............................. 314 Determining the maximum..................... 313
Perfume see Perfume atomizer
Perfume atomizer Inserting/removing the flacon............... 136 Setting................................................... 136
Perfume vial see Perfume atomizer
Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 167 Standby mode function.......................... 167
Permitted towing methods...................... 295
Pets in the vehicle....................................... 63
Plastic trim (Care)..................................... 281 Power closing function
Door........................................................ 71 Power supply
Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 140 Power washer (care)................................. 277 Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
Function.................................................. 50 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Reversing measures................................ 50
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection plus)
Function.................................................. 50 Reversing measures................................ 50 Preventative occupant protection sys- tem see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- pant protection) Profile Creating a new profile........................... 237 Notes.................................................... 235 Selecting profile options........................ 237 Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 20
Protection against collision.............. 219, 220
Index 431
Pulling away see Driving tips
Q QR code
Rescue card............................................ 29 Qualified specialist workshop.................... 27
R Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Damage................................................. 168 Radio
Overview of the functions and sym- bols....................................................... 264 Radio operating permits........................... 337 Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof........................................ 83 Reading lamp see Interior lighting Reading light Switching on/off with hand move- ments.................................................... 235
Rear fog lamp Switching on/off.................................... 117
Rear seat see Seat
Rear view camera Care...................................................... 280 Function................................................ 205 Opening the camera cover (360° Camera)................................................. 211
Rear window Roller sunblind........................................ 85
Rear window heater.................................. 133
Reflective safety vest............................... 283
Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Notes.................................................... 344
Refueling Refueling the vehicle............................. 158
Remote Online Charging the starter battery.................. 143 Cooling or heating the vehicle interior... 142 Starting the vehicle............................... 143
Reporting safety defects............................ 28
Rescue card................................................. 29 Reserve
Fuel........................................................ 341 Residual heat............................................. 136 Restraint system
Basic instructions for children................. 51 Function in an accident........................... 36 Functionality............................................ 35 Malfunction............................................. 36 Protection................................................ 35 Reduced protection................................. 35 Self-test................................................... 35 Warning lamp.......................................... 35 Reverse gear Inserting................................................ 155 Rims (care)................................................. 280
Roadside Assistance (breakdown)............ 22 Roll away protection
see HOLD function Roller sunblind
Panorama roof with power tilt/slid- ing panel.................................................. 81 Rear window............................................ 85
432 Index
Roof load.................................................... 347 Roof luggage rack
Loading.................................................. 111 Securing................................................. 111 Route Calculating............................................ 244 Selecting options................................... 244 Route guidance with augmented real- ity Activating.............................................. 244 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 244 Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 183 Setting................................................... 184 Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires.................................. 285
S Safety systems
see Driving safety system Satellite radio
Logging in.............................................. 268
Setting music and sport alerts.............. 268 Search light
Switching on/off with hand move- ments.................................................... 235 Seat 4-way lumbar support............................. 93 Adjusting (electrically)............................. 93 Adjusting (manually and electrically)....... 92 Adjusting (mechanically and electri- cally)........................................................ 90 Automatic seat adjustment..................... 95 Backrest (rear) locking.......................... 109 Configuring the settings.......................... 95 Correct driver's seat position.................. 89 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) back............................... 108 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards...... 107 Folding the backrest forwards/back (with memory function)........................... 97 Massage program overview..................... 96 Operating the memory function............ 104 Panel heating.......................................... 99 Resetting the settings.............................. 97 Setting options........................................ 14 Switching AIRSCARF on/off.................... 99
Workout program overview...................... 96 Seat belt
Care....................................................... 281 Fastening................................................. 40 Protection................................................ 37 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating........................... 41 Function................................................... 41
Seat belt extender....................................... 40
Seat belt warning see Seat belts
Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 41 Reduced protection................................. 38 Releasing................................................. 42 Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 41 Seat belt extender................................... 40 Warning lamp.......................................... 42
Seat cover (Care)....................................... 281
Seat heating Activating/deactivating........................... 97
Index 433
Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating........................... 99
Selecting a gear see Changing gears
Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test Automatic front passenger front air- bag shutoff.............................................. 47
Sensors (care)........................................... 280
Service center see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS
Setting a speed see Cruise control
Setting the map scale see Map
Shift paddles see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation.................... 157
Side airbag................................................... 42 Side windows
Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment......................... 62 Closing.................................................... 78 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 80 Convenience closing feature................... 80 Convenience opening.............................. 79 Opening................................................... 78 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 79 Problem................................................... 80 Size designation (tires)............................. 319 Sliding sunroof Automatic features.................................. 83 Closing.................................................... 81 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 80 Opening................................................... 81 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 79 Problem................................................... 84 Rain-closing feature................................. 83 SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal......... 66 Battery..................................................... 67 Energy consumption................................ 66
Features.................................................. 64 Key ring attachment................................ 67 Mechanical key........................................ 67 Overview................................................. 64 Panic alarm............................................. 66 Problem................................................... 68 Unlocking setting.................................... 66 SmartKey functions Deactivating............................................ 66 Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone Smartphone integration Overview............................................... 257
Snow chains.............................................. 305
Socket (12 V) Front center console.............................. 112
Software update System updates..................................... 238
Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Wheels and tires.................................... 304
434 Index
Sound menu Functions overview............................... 269
Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel
Special seat belt retractor.......................... 55
Specialist workshop.................................... 27
Speed index (tires).................................... 319 Standby mode
Activating/deactivating......................... 167 Function................................................. 167 Standing lights........................................... 116 Start-off assist see Optimized acceleration Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................ 160 Starting the vehicle................................ 141 Switching on the power supply or ignition.................................................. 140 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)...................... 143
Starting assistance see Jump-start connection
Starting the engine see Vehicle
Starting-off aid see Hill start assist
STEER CONTROL Function/notes...................................... 172
Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically)........................... 101 Adjusting (manually).............................. 100 Buttons.................................................. 224 Care....................................................... 281 Operating the memory function............ 104 Steering wheel heater........................... 102
Steering wheel heater Switching on/off................................... 102
Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 156
Storage areas see Storage compartment
Storage compartment Armrest................................................. 107 Center console...................................... 107
Door...................................................... 107 Glove box............................................... 107 Storage compartments see Storage compartment Storage spaces USB ports.............................................. 107 Stowage areas see Loading Stowage compartments see Loading Suggestions Configuring............................................ 237
Sulfur content........................................... 340
Surround lighting Switching on/off................................... 124
Surround View see 360° Camera
Surround view camera Care...................................................... 280
Suspension Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)................................... 204 Damping characteristics........................ 202
Index 435
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 202 Suspension
see AIR BODY CONTROL Switch-off delay time
Exterior.................................................. 124 Interior.................................................. 125 Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul- timedia system)..................................... 135 Switching on/off (control panel)........... 135 System settings Overview of the system settings menu..................................................... 237
T Tailpipes (care).......................................... 280 Tank content
Fuel........................................................ 341 Reserve (fuel)........................................ 341 Technical data Information............................................ 335 Radio operating permits........................ 337
Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... 250 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)...................................... 250 Functions in the telephone menu.......... 250 Notes..................................................... 247 Operating modes................................... 249 Telephone menu overview..................... 249 Wireless charging (mobile phone).......... 114
Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® Telephony............................ 249
Temperature Setting the vehicle interior tempera- ture........................................................ 133
Temperature grade.................................... 316 Themes
Fastening............................................... 237 Through-loading feature
see Seat TIN (Tire Identification Number).............. 317
Tire and Loading Information placard..... 312
Tire characteristics................................... 319
Tire inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit
Tire information table............................... 312 Tire labeling
Characteristics...................................... 319 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 317 Load index............................................. 319 Load-bearing capacity............................ 319 Maximum tire load................................. 318 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 318 Overview................................................ 316 Speed rating.......................................... 319 Temperature grade................................ 316 Tire Quality Grading............................... 316 Tire size designation.............................. 319 Traction grade........................................ 316 Tread wear grade................................... 316 Tire load (maximum)................................. 318 Tire pressure Checking (manually).............................. 308 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. 310 Maximum............................................... 318 Notes.................................................... 305
436 Index
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system...................................... 311 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 310 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 311 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 308 Tire pressure table................................ 307 TIREFIT kit............................................. 286 Tire pressure loss warning system Function................................................. 311 Restarting.............................................. 311 Tire pressure monitor Function................................................ 308 Restarting.............................................. 310 Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure..................... 310 Checking the tire temperature............... 310 Tire pressure table.................................... 307
Tire Quality Grading.................................. 316 Tire temperature
Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. 310
Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 308
Tire tread................................................... 304
Tire-change tool kit Overview............................................... 327
TIREFIT kit Storage location.................................... 286 Using..................................................... 286
Tires Changing hub caps................................ 328 Characteristics...................................... 319 Checking............................................... 304 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 308 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system)........................ 310 Definitions............................................. 321 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 317 Flat tire.................................................. 284 Installing................................................ 331 Load index............................................. 319 Load-bearing capacity............................ 319 Maximum tire load................................. 318 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 318 MOExtended tires.................................. 285
Noise..................................................... 304 Notes on installing................................. 324 Overview of tire labeling........................ 316 Removing............................................... 331 Replacing...................................... 324, 328 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system...................................... 311 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 310 Rotating................................................. 327 Selection............................................... 324 Snow chains.......................................... 305 Speed rating.......................................... 319 Storing................................................... 327 Temperature grade................................ 316 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 312 Tire pressure (notes)............................. 305 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 311 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 308 Tire pressure table................................ 307 Tire Quality Grading............................... 316 Tire size designation.............................. 319 TIREFIT kit............................................. 286 Traction grade........................................ 316
Index 437
Tread wear grade................................... 316 Unusual handling characteristics.......... 304 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether.................................................... 58 Touch Control On-board computer............................... 224 Operating.............................................. 231 Touchpad Operating.............................................. 231 Touchscreen (media display) Operating.............................................. 231 Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating........................... 87 Function.................................................. 87 Tow-bar system......................................... 221
Tow-starting............................................... 300
Towing away.............................................. 296 Towing eye
Installing................................................ 299 Storage location.................................... 299 Towing methods........................................ 295
Traction grade............................................ 316 Traffic information
Switching on the display........................ 246 Traffic light data service
Display in the Instrument Display.......... 196 Turning the display on/off..................... 198 Traffic Sign Assist Function/notes...................................... 194 Setting................................................... 195 System limitations................................. 194 Transmission position display.................. 154 Transporting Vehicle.................................................. 298 Tread wear grade....................................... 316
Trim element (Care)................................... 281 Trunk lid
Closing.................................................... 73 Emergency release (from inside)............. 77 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 75 Locking separately.................................. 77 Opening................................................... 72 Opening dimensions.............................. 345
TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 267
Turn signal indicator.................................. 117 Turn signal light
Activating/deactivating......................... 117 Two-way radios
Frequencies........................................... 336 Notes on installation............................. 335 Transmission output (maximum)........... 336
U Unlocking setting........................................ 66 Updates
Important system updates.................... 238 USB port
Rear passenger compartment................ 113
V Vehicle
Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 167 Collision detection (parking).................. 166 Correct use............................................. 27 Data acquisition...................................... 29
438 Index
Data storage............................................ 29 Diagnostics connection........................... 25 Equipment............................................... 21 Limited Warranty..................................... 29 Locking (automatically)........................... 70 Locking (from inside)............................... 69 Locking (KEYLESS-GO)............................ 69 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)........ 71 Lowering............................................... 332 Maintenance........................................... 22 Medical aids............................................ 27 Parking for an extended period.............. 166 Problem notification................................ 28 QR code rescue card............................... 29 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 27 Raising.................................................. 329 Standby mode function.......................... 167 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 142 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 143 Starting (start/stop button)................... 141 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 160 Towing................................................... 221 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 69 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)......................... 69 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 79
Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT).............. 153 Roof load............................................... 347 Turning circle......................................... 345 Vehicle height........................................ 345 Vehicle length........................................ 345 Vehicle width......................................... 345 Wheelbase............................................. 345
Vehicle data storage Event data recorders............................... 33 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 33
Vehicle dimensions................................... 345
Vehicle electronics Notes.................................................... 335 Two-way radios...................................... 335
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate Paint code............................................. 337 VIN........................................................ 337
Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 142
Vehicle key see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada..................... 22
Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit............................................. 286 Towing eye............................................ 299
Ventilating Convenience opening.............................. 79
Ventilation see Climate control
Vents see Air vents
VIN Identification plate................................ 337 Seat....................................................... 337 Windshield............................................. 337
Vision Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 135
Voice Control System Function................................................ 232 Starting................................................. 233
W Warning lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle
Removing.............................................. 283 Setting up.............................................. 284 Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ 406 æ Active Brake Assist warning lamp...................................................... 405 J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)........................................ 404 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only).... 404 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)........................................ 403 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... 399
Index 439
ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 400 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)....................... 402 F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................ 402 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... 401 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp.... 400
å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... 407
÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes.......... 406
÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 407 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes................................................... 401 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................. 401 Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 398 é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)....................... 403 6 Restraint system warning lamp.... 397
ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes.... 397 ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.......................................................... 398 ä Suspension warning lamp (yel- low)....................................................... 405 ! The electric parking brake (yel- low) indicator lamp................................ 402 h Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes..................... 408 h Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up................... 409 L Warning lamp for distance warning function................................... 405
Warning/indicator lamps Overview............................................... 395 PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. 47
Warranty...................................................... 29
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing by hand (care)............................ 278
440 Index
Water tank see Air-water duct
Weather information................................. 246 Web browser
Overview (multimedia system).............. 256 Wheel change
Lowering the vehicle............................. 332 Mounting a new wheel........................... 331 Removing a wheel.................................. 331 Removing/installing hub caps............... 328 Wheel rotation........................................... 327 Wheels Care...................................................... 280 Changing hub caps................................ 328 Checking............................................... 304 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 308 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system)........................ 310 Definitions............................................. 321 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 317 Flat tire.................................................. 284 Installing................................................ 331 Load index............................................. 319 Load-bearing capacity............................ 319
Maximum tire load................................. 318 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 318 MOExtended tires.................................. 285 Noise..................................................... 304 Notes on installing................................. 324 Overview of tire labeling........................ 316 Removing............................................... 331 Replacing...................................... 324, 328 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system...................................... 311 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 310 Rotating................................................. 327 Selection............................................... 324 Snow chains.......................................... 305 Speed rating.......................................... 319 Storing................................................... 327 Temperature grade................................ 316 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 312 Tire characteristics................................ 319 Tire pressure (notes)............................. 305 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 311 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 308 Tire pressure table................................ 307
Tire Quality Grading............................... 316 Tire size designation.............................. 319 TIREFIT kit............................................. 286 Traction grade........................................ 316 Tread wear grade................................... 316 Unusual handling characteristics.......... 304 Wi-Fi Setting................................................... 239
Window curtain airbag............................... 42
Windows see Side windows
Windows (care).......................................... 280
Windshield Defrosting.............................................. 133 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 126 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. 128
Windshield see Windshield
Windshield washer fluid Notes.................................................... 343
Windshield washer system Topping up............................................. 276
Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating......................... 126 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 126 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. 128
Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 305
Wiper blades Care...................................................... 280 Replacing............................................... 126 Replacing (MAGIC VISION CONTROL).... 128
Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 113 Mobile phone......................................... 114
Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity........................ 25
Workout program Overview................................................. 96
Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Index 441
AH XSL Formatter V6.4 MR1 for Windows (x64) : 6.4.3.27525 (2017/01/23 10:11JST) OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S)